User - Manual Mts

Global Customer Documentation
DIMETRATM
System Documentation
Dimetra IP /
Dimetra IP Compact /
Scalable Dimetra IP
TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS)

User Guide
2FWRber 2010
When printed by Motorola
6802700U57-:
Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries
preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in
the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola.
Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the
copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal nonexclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale
of a product.
Disclaimer
Please note that certain features, facilities and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or licensed for use on a particular system, or
may be dependent upon the characteristics of a particular mobile subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola contact
for further information.
Trademarks
MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent & Trademark Office. All other product or service names are the property of their
respective owners.
Copyrights
© 2003 - 2010 Motorola Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by
any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.
European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The European Union’s WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trashbin label on the product (or the package
in some cases).
As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trashbin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and
electrical equipment or accessories in household waste.
Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection
system in their country.
CMM labeling and disclosure table
The People’s Republic of China requires that Motorola’s products comply with
China Management Methods (CMM) environmental regulations. (China
Management Methods refers to the regulation Management Methods for
Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products.) Two items are used to
demonstrate compliance; the label and the disclosure table.
The label is placed in a customer visible position on the product.
• Logo 1 means that the product contains no substances in excess of the
maximum concentration value for materials identified in the China
Management Methods regulation.
• Logo 2 means that the product may contain substances in excess of the
maximum concentration value for materials identified in the China
Management Methods regulation, and has an Environmental Friendly
Use Period (EFUP) in years, fifty years in the example shown.
Logo 1 Logo 2
The Environmental Friendly Use Period (EFUP) is the period (in years) during
which the Toxic and Hazardous Substances (T&HS) contained in the Electronic
Information Product (EIP) will not leak or mutate causing environmental pollution
or bodily injury from the use of the EIP. The EFUP indicated by the Logo 2 label
applies to a product and all its parts. Certain field-replaceable parts, such as
battery modules, can have a different EFUP and are marked separately.
The Disclosure Table is intended only to communicate compliance with China
requirements; it is not intended to communicate compliance with EU RoHS or any
other environmental requirements.
© 20 Motorola, Inc.

Dimetra IP Compact R4.1 Documentation Overview
System Manuals System Management
353: Fault Management
354: Unified Event Manager
355: Zone Watch
System Glossary System FullVision Fault
356: System and Zone Profile
Overview Reference Management
357: System Alarms and Events
Guide
68015000406 6802800U86 68015000407 68015000358 68015000352
384: Hardware and Software Safety Installation 361: User Configuration Manager
Guidelines 362: Zone Configuration Manager
419: Common Hardware and Software 363: Configuring Features
Backup/Restore Restoration System Alarms Configuration 364: Software Download
Including 420: Backup And Restore Including FRU/FRE & Events Management
FRU/FRE on FullVision
68015000418 68015000359 68015000360
366: Radio Management

367: Affiliation Display
368: ATIA Log Viewer
Administering Data Telephone Security Radio and 369: Radio Control Manager
Combined Subsystem Interconnect Management Radio User 370: Radio Control Manager Reports
NM / ZC Server Subsystem Management 371: Fleetmapping
68015000408 68015000381 68015000382 68015000377 68015000365
373: Performance Management

Security/Authentication 374: Dynamic Reports
375: Historical Reports
Performance
398: Secure Voice, Data and Key Management Management
399: MCC 7500S Dispatch Console
402: End-to-End Secure Packet Data
End-to-End CryptR
and Short Data
Secure Instruction 68015000422
Communications Manual
68015000423 68015000170
Tools
395: Authentication and Provisioning Subsystem
396: Managing Authentication,
Encryption and Provisioning
Authentication, Air Interface Alphanumeric Backup/Restore
Encryption Encryption Text Service Collector
and Provisioning KVL3000 Plus Application
User Guide User Guide
68015000394 6802800U15 68015000325 6866600D53
PCI Crypto Provisioning End-to-End AUC Crypto TESS Software Network

Card Upgrade Centre (PrC) Encryption Card Instruction User Guide Configuration
Manual User Manual KVL3000 Plus Manual Tool (NCT)
User Guide Express
6881132E24 6802800U40 6802800U14 6802800U71 6802700U57 68015000417
Console Manuals Quick Reference Online Help

Guides
344: MCC 7500 Console Sites Affiliation Display Online Help
345: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Application Launcher Online Help
346: MCC 7500 Archiving Interface Server Authentication Centre Online Help
MCC 7500 Managing Radio Historical Reports Online Help
349: MCC 7500 Analog Conventional Operation
Dispatch Users, Radios, Dynamic Reports Online Help
350: MCC 7500 Bandwidth Management
Consoles Talkgroups Quick ATIA Log Viewer Online Help
351: MCC 7500 Console Interoperability
Subsystem Reference Guide UEM Online Help
FullVision Online Help
68015000421 68015000409
RCM Online Help
RCM Reports Online Help
Software Download Online Help
UCM Online Help
ZCM Online Help
MCC 7500 MCC 7500 MCC 7500 Managing the
ZoneWatch Online Help
Elite Admin Elite Dispatch Emergency Infrastructure
System and Zone Profile Online Help
Software Software Beacon Quick Reference
KMF Online Help
User Guide User Guide User Guide Guide TESS Online Help
6866600D74 6866600D75 6866600D79 68015000411 MCC7500 Online Help
Discreet Listening Online Help
Dimetra IP R7.1 Documentation Overview
System Management System Manuals
353: Fault Management
354: Unified Event Manager
355: Zone Watch
Fault System Glossary Managing Common
356: System and Zone Profile
Management Overview Upgraded Hardware and
357: System Alarms and Events
Systems Software
68015000352 68015000330 6802800U86 68015000404 68015000378

361: User Configuration Manager
362: Zone Configuration Manager 384: Hardware and Software Safety Installation Guidelines
363: Configuring Features 385: Common Hardware and Software Restoration
Configuration 364: Software Download 386: Call Processing Restoration
Management Backup/Restore 387: Network Transport Subsystem Restoration
Including 388: Network Management Subsystem Restoration
FRU/FRE 389: Console Sites Restoration
68015000360 390: Standalone Subsystems Restoration
68015000383 391: Security Subsystems Restoration
366: Radio Management 392: Base Stations Restoration Agency Priority
367: Affiliation Display 393: Appendices Matrix (APM)
Radio and 368: ATIA Log Viewer
Radio User 369: Radio Control Manager 332: Master Site Overview
Management 370: Radio Control Manager Reports 333: Call Processing Subsystem
371: Fleetmapping 6866600D67
Network Transport Subsystem:
Master Site 334: Master Site LAN Switch
68015000365 Core Elements 335: Motorola Network Routers
373: Performance Management 336: Cooperative WAN Routing
374: Dynamic Reports 337: Ethernet Site Links Active Directory/
375: Historical Reports 68015000331 338: Router Encryption Domain Name
Performance Network Management Subsystem: Services
376: InfoVista
Management 339: Network Management Servers
340: Network Management Client
341: Remote Access 68015000426
342: Network Time Server
68015000372
Security FullVision System Alarms MultiCADI Radio User Telephone Data

Management & Events Assignment/ Interconnect Subsystem
on FullVision Radio User Subsystem
Identity
68015000377 68015000358 68015000359 68015000380 68015000379 68015000152 68015000381
Security/Authentication Console Manuals

398: Secure Voice, Data and Key Management 344: MCC 7500 Console Sites
399: MCC 7500S Dispatch Console 345: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console
400: MCC 7500S ICCS Gateway 346: MCC 7500 Archiving Interface Server
End-To-End CryptR MCC 7500
401: CryptR and Audio Module for Replay 347: MCC 7500 ICCS Gateway
Secure Instruction Dispatch
402: End-to-End Secure Packet Data 348: MCC 7500 Discreet Listening
Communications Manual Consoles
and Short Data 349: MCC 7500 Analog Conventional Operation
Subsystem
350: MCC 7500 Bandwidth Management
68015000397 68015000170 68015000343 351: MCC 7500 Console Interoperability
395: Authentication and

Provisioning
Subsystem
Authentication, Network Air Interface MCC 7500 MCC 7500 MCC 7500
396: Managing
Encryption Security Encryption Elite Admin Elite Dispatch Emergency
Authentication,
and Provisioning Subsystem KVL3000 Plus Software Software Beacon
Encryption and
User Guide User Guide User Guide User Guide
Provisioning
68015000394 68015000403 6802800U15 6866600D74 6866600D75 6866600D79
Tools Online Help

Affiliation Display Online Help
Application Launcher Online Help
PCI Crypto End to End
Authentication Centre Online Help
Card Upgrade Encryption Alphanumeric Backup/Restore UCS Historical Reports Online Help
Manual KVL3000 Plus Text Service Collector Synchronization Dynamic Reports Online Help
User Guide Application Tool ATIA Log Viewer Online Help
6881132E24 6802800U14 User Guide UEM Online Help
FullVision
68015000325 6866600D53 6802800U62
RCM Online Help
Provisioning AUC Crypto UCM Online Help
Centre (PrC) Card Instruction TESS Software Transport ZCM Online Help
User Manual Manual User Guide Network ZoneWatch Online Help
Configuration System and Zone Profile Online Help
Tool (TNCT) KMF Online Help
6802800U40 6802800U71 TESS Online Help
6802700U57 68015000410
MCC7500 Online Help
Dimetra IP Compact R4.0
System Manuals
Dimetra IP Dimetra IP Backup/Restore System Administering Data Telephone

System Glossary Including Reference Servers and Subsystem Interconnect
Overview FRU/FRE Guide Controllers Subsystem
68015000172 6802800U86 68015000174 68015000173 68015000299 68015000153 68015000152
System Management
Bk.1: Performance Management Bk.1: User Configuration Manager
Bk.2: Dynamic Reports Bk.2: Zone Configuration Manager
Bk.3: Historical Reports Bk.3: Configuring Features
Performance Bk.4: InfoVista Configuration Bk.4: Software Download
Management Management
68015000158 68015000162
Bk.1: Fault Management Bk.1: Radio Management

Bk.2: FullVision Bk.2: Affiliation Display
Fault Bk.3: Zone Watch Radio and Bk.3: ATIA Log Viewer Security
Management Bk.4: System and Zone Profile Radio User Bk.4: Radio Control Manager Management
Bk.5: System Alarms and Events Management Bk.5: Radio Control Manager Reports
Bk.6: Fleetmapping
68015000189 68015000160 6866600D59
Security/Authentication Quick Reference

Guides
Bk.1: Secure Voice, Data and Key Management
Bk.2: MCC 7500S Dispatch Console
Bk.3: MCC 7500S ICCS Gateway
End-To-End Provisioning Server and
Bk.4: CryptR and Audio Module for Replay
Secure Centre (PrC) NM Client
Bk.5: End-to-End Secure Packet Data and Short Data
Communications User Manual Quick Reference
Guide
68015000169 6802800U40 68015000300
Bk.1: Authentication and Provisioning Subsystem

Bk.2: Managing Authentication, Encryption and Provisioning
Authentication PCI Crypto Managing Radio

Encryption Card Upgrade Users, Radios,
and Provisioning Manual Talkgroups Quick
Reference Guide
68015000163 6881132E24 6866600D49
Air Interface AUC Crypto CryptR End to End Managing the

Encryption Card Instruction Instruction Encryption Infrastructure
KVL3000 Plus Manual Manual KVL3000 Plus Quick Reference
User Guide User Guide Guide
6802800U15 6802800U71 68015000170 6802800U14 68015000186
Console Manuals Online Help

Bk.1: MCC 7500 Console Sites Affiliation Display Online Help
Bk.2: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Application Launcher Online Help
Bk.3: MCC 7500 Archiving Interface Server Authentication Centre Online Help
MCC 7500 Historical Reports Online Help
Bk.4: MCC 7500 ICCS Gateway
Dispatch Dynamic Reports Online Help
Bk.5: MCC 7500 Analog Conventional Operation
Consoles ATIA Log Viewer Online Help
Bk.6: MCC 7500 Bandwidth Management
Subsystem FV Online Help
Bk.7: MCC 7500 Console Interoperability
RCM Online Help
68015000167 RCM Reports Online Help
UCM Online Help
ZCM Online Help
MCC 7500 MCC 7500 MCC 7500 MCC 7500 ZoneWatch Online Help
Elite Dispatch Emergency Elite Admin Discreet System and Zone Profile Online Help
Software Beacon Software Listening KMF Online Help
User Guide User Guide User Guide TESS Online Help
MCC7500 Online Help
6866600D75 6866600D79 6866600D74 6866600D64 Discreet Listening Online Help
Dimetra IP R7.0
System Manuals
Bk.1: Master Site Overview Bk.1: Hardware and Software Safety Installation Guidelines
Bk.2: Call Processing Subsystem Bk.2: Common Hardware and Software Restoration
Bk.3: Network Transport Subsystem
Master Site Backup/Restore Bk.3: Call Processing Restoration Data
Bk.3-1: Master Site LAN Switch Bk.4: Network Transport Subsystem Restoration
Core Elements Including Subsystem
Bk.3-2: Cooperative WAN Routing Bk.5: Network Management Subsystem Restoration
FRU/FRE
Bk.3-3: Motorola Network Routers Bk.6: Console Sites Restoration
Bk.4: Network Management Subsystem Bk.7: Standalone Subsystems Restoration
68015000166 Bk.4-1: Network Management Servers 68015000159 Bk.8: Security Subsystems Restoration 68015000153
Bk.4-2: Network Management Client Bk.9: Base Stations Restoration
Bk.5: Remote Access Bk.10: Appendixes
Bk.6: Network Time Protocol Server
Dimetra IP Dimetra IP Differences Man, Common Active Directory/ Agency Priority Telephone
System Glossary Dimetra IP Hardware and Domain Name Matrix (APM) Interconnect
Overview D6.2 SR to Software Services Subsystem
Dimetra IP 7.0
68015000165 6802800U86 68015000177 68015000154 68015000157 6866600D67 68015000152
System Management
Bk.1: Performance Management Bk.1: User Configuration Manager
Bk.2: Dynamic Reports Bk.2: Zone Configuration Manager MultiCADI Radio User
Bk.3: Historical Reports Bk.3: Configuring Features Server Assignment/
Performance Bk.4: InfoVista Configuration Bk.4: Software Download Radio User
Management Management Identity
68015000150 68015000151
68015000158 68015000162
Bk.1: Fault Management Bk.1: Radio Management

Bk.2: Unified Event Manager Bk.2: Affiliation Display
Fault Bk.3: Zone Watch Radio and Bk.3: ATIA Log Viewer Security
Management Bk.4: System and Zone Profile Radio User Bk.4: Radio Control Manager Management
Bk.5: System Alarms and Events Management Bk.5: Radio Control Manager Reports
Bk.6: Fleetmapping
68015000164 68015000160 6866600D59
Security/Authentication
Bk.1: Secure Voice, Data and Key Management
Bk.2: MCC 7500S Dispatch Console
Bk.3: MCC 7500S ICCS Gateway
End-To-End Bk.4: CryptR and Audio Module for Replay Provisioning PCI Crypto CryptR Network
Secure Bk.5: End-to-End Secure Packet Data Centre (PrC) Card Upgrade Instruction Security
Communications and Short Data User Manual Manual Manual Subsystem
68015000169 6802800U40 6881132E24 68015000170 68015000176

Authentication End to End Air Interface AUC Crypto

Encryption Encryption Encryption Card Instruction
and Provisioning KVL3000 Plus KVL3000 Plus Manual
68015000163 6802800U14 6802800U15 6802800U71
Console Manuals Tools Online Help

Bk.1: MCC 7500 Console Sites Affiliation Display Online Help
Bk.2: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Application Launcher Online Help
Bk.3: MCC 7500 Archiving Interface Server Authentication Centre Online Help
MCC 7500 Backup/Restore Historical Reports Online Help
Bk.4: MCC 7500 ICCS Gateway
Dispatch Collector Dynamic Reports Online Help
Bk.5: MCC 7500 Analog Conventional Operation
Consoles Application ATIA Log Viewer Online Help
Bk.6: MCC 7500 Bandwidth Management
Subsystem User Guide UEM Online Help
Bk.7: MCC 7500 Console Interoperability
RCM Online Help
68015000167 6866600D53
UCM Online Help
ZCM Online Help
MCC 7500 MCC 7500 MCC 7500 MCC 7500 UCS ZoneWatch Online Help
Elite Dispatch Emergency Elite Admin Discreet Synchronization System and Zone Profile Online Help
Software Beacon Software Listening Tool KMF Online Help
User Guide User Guide User Guide TESS Online Help
6866600D75 6866600D79 6866600D74 6866600D64 6802800U62 MCC7500 Online Help
Dimetra IP Compact R3.0
System Manuals
System Administering
Dimetra IP Backup/Restore Dimetra IP
Reference Servers
System Including Glossary
Guide
Overview FRU/FRE
6866600D80 6866600D81 6866600D83 6866600D86 6802800U86
System Management
Fault Bk.1: Fault Management Configuration Bk.1: User Configuration Manager

Management Bk.2: FullVision Management Bk.2: Zone Configuration Manager
Bk.3: Zone Watch Bk.3: Configuring Features
Bk.4: System and Zone Profile Bk.4: Software Download
6866600D55 6866600D56
Radio and Bk.1: Radio Management Performance Bk.1: Performance Management Security
Radio User Bk.2: Affiliation Display Management Bk.2: Dynamic Reports Management
management Bk.3: ATIA Log Viewer
Bk.3: Historical Reports
Bk.4: Radio Control Manager
Bk.4: InfoVista
Bk.5: Radio Control Manager Reports
6866600D57 Bk.6: Fleetmapping 6866600D58 6866600D59
Console Manuals
Bk.1: MCC 7500 Console Sites

MCC 7500 Bk.2: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console MCC 7500 MCC 7500
Feature Manual Bk.3: MCC 7500 ICCS Gateway Subsystem Elite Admin Elite Dispatch
Bk.4: MCC 7500 Call Logging Feature Manual Software Software
Bk.5: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Subsystem and Conventional Analog Operation User Guide User Guide
Bk.6: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Subsystem and Bandwidth Management
6866600D63 Bk.7: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Subsystem Interoperability 6866600D74 6866600D75
Quick Reference Guides Feature Manuals
Managing Radio Managing the Server and Telephone

Data
Users, Radios, Infrastructure NM Client Interconnect
Feature Manual
Talkgroups Quick Quick Reference Quick Reference Feature Manual
Reference Guide Guide Guide
6866600D49 6866600D50 6866600D82 6866600D65 6866600D66
Authentication Managing
Encryption Bk.1: Authentication and Provisioning Subsystem Secure Bk.1: End-to-End Secure Voice
and Provisioning Bk.2: Managing Authentication, Encryption Communications Bk.2: End-to-End Secure Console
and Provisioning
6866600D70 6866600D71
End to End Air Interface Provisioning PCI Crypto KMF CryptR AUC Crypto
Encryption Encryption Centre (PrC) Card Upgrade Instruction Card Instruction
KVL3000 Plus KVL3000 Plus User Manual Manual Manual Manual
6802800U14 6802800U15 6802800U40 6881132E24 6866600D22 6802800U71
Online Help
Affiliation Display Online Help Performance Reports Online Help RCM Online Help Zone Watch Online Help
Application Launcher Online Help - Historical reports RCM Reports Online Help System and Zone Profile Online Help
Authentication Centre Online Help - Dynamic Reports Software Download Online Help KMF Online Help
FullVision Online Help - ATIA Log Viewer UCM Online Help TESS Online Help
ZCM Online Help MCC7500 Online Help
Dimetra IP System Release 6.2
System Manuals System Management
Bk.1: Fault Management Bk.1: User Configuration
Differences Man, Bk.2: FullVision Manager
Dimetra IP Dimetra IP Fault Configuration
Dimetra IP Bk.3: Zone Watch Bk.2: Zone Configuration
System Glossary Management Management
2004/5 to Bk.4: System and Zone Manager
Overview Profile
Dimetra IP D6.2SR Bk.3: Configuring
Features
6866600D54 6802800U86 6866600D52 6866600D55 6866600D56 Bk.4: Software Download
Bk.1: HW and SW Safety Installation Guidelines

Bk.2: Call Processing
Bk.1: Radio Management
Bk.3: Network Transport Subsystem Bk.1: Performance
Radio and Bk.2: Affiliation Display Performance
Backup/Restore Bk.4: Network Transport Management Management
Radio User Bk.3: ATIA Log Viewer Management
Including Bk.5: Network Management Subsystem Bk.2: Dynamic Reports
Management Bk.4: Radio Control
FRU/FRE Bk.6: Console Sites Bk.3: Historical Reports
Manager
Bk.7: Feature Subsystems Bk.4: InfoVista
Bk.5: Radio Control
6866600D69 Bk.8: Security Subsystems 6866600D57 Manager Reports 6866600D58
Bk.9: Base Stations
Bk.6: Fleetmapping
Bk.10: Appendixes
Bk.1: Master Site Overview Bk.4: Network Transport Management

Bk.2: Call Processing Subsystem Bk.4-1: Server Platform
Master Site Bk.3: Network Transport Subsystem Bk.4-2: Network Transport Management Servers Security
Core Elements Bk.3-1: Master Site LAN Switch Bk.4-3: Active Directory/Domain Name Services Management
Bk.3-2: Cooperative WAN Routing Bk.5: Network Management Subsystem
Bk.3-3: Master Site Routers Bk.5-1: Private Network Management Server
Bk.3-4: Router Manager Bk.5-2: Private Network Management Client 6866600D59
6866600D60
Bk.6: Remote Access
Bk.7: Network Time Protocol Server
Feature Manuals Tools
Agency Priority Data MultiCADI RUA / RUI Telephone Backup/Restore UCS

Matrix (APM) Feature Manual Feature Manual Feature Manual Interconnect Collector Synchronisation
Feature Manual Feature Manual Application Tool Manual
User Guide
6866600D67 6866600D65 6866600D62 6866600D61 6866600D66 6866600D53 6802800U62
Authentication Managing Network

Encryption Bk.1: Authentication and Provisioning Subsystem Secure Bk.1: End-to-End Secure Voice Security
and Provisioning Bk.2: Managing Authentication, Encryption Communications Bk.2: End-to-End Secure Console Feature Manual
and Provisioning
6866600D70 6866600D71 6866600D72
End to End Air Interface Provisioning PCI Crypto KMF CryptR AUC Crypto
Encryption Encryption Centre (PrC) Card Upgrade Instruction Card Instruction
KVL3000 Plus KVL3000 Plus User Manual Manual Manual Manual
6802800U14 6802800U15 6802800U40 6881132E24 6866600D22 6802800U71

Bk.1: MCC 7500 Console Sites Application Launcher Online Help
MCC 7500 Bk.2: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Authentication Centre Online Help
Feature Manual Bk.3: MCC 7500 ICCS Gateway Subsystem Performance Reports Online Help
Bk.4: MCC 7500 Call Logging Feature Manual - Historical reports
Bk.5: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Subsystem and Conventional Analog Operation - Dynamic Reports
Bk.6: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Subsystem and Bandwidth Management - ATIA Log Viewer
6866600D63 Bk.7: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Subsystem Interoperability FullVision Online Help
RCM Online Help
UCM Online Help
Discreet MCC 7500 MCC 7500 Emergency ZCM Online Help
Listening Elite Admin Elite Dispatch Beacon ZoneWatch Online Help
Feature Manual Software Software User Guide System and Zone Profile Online Help
User Guide User Guide KMF Online Help
TESS Online Help
6866600D64 6866600D74 6866600D75 6866600D79 MCC7500 Online Help
Dimetra IP Compact R2.0 / Scalable Dimetra IP R2.0
System Administering
Dimetra IP Backup/Restore Dimetra IP
Reference Servers
System Including Glossary
Guide
Overview FRU/FRE
6866600D35 6866600D44 6866600D48 6866600D51 6802800U86
Management Documentation
Fault Bk.1: Fault Management Configuration Bk.1: User Configuration Manager

Management Bk.2: FullVision Management Bk.2: Zone Configuration Manager
Bk.3: Zone Watch Bk.3: Configuring Features
Bk.4: System and Zone Profile Bk.4: Software Download
6866600D36 6866600D37
Radio and Bk.1: Radio Management Performance Bk.1: Performance Management Security
Radio User Bk.2: Affiliation Display Management Bk.2: Dynamic Reports Management
management Bk.3: ATIA Log Viewer
Bk.3: Historical Reports
Bk.4: Radio Control Manager
Bk.5: Radio Control Manager Reports
6866600D38 Bk.6: Fleetmapping 6866600D39 6866600D40
Console Manuals
MCC 7500 Bk.1: MCC 7500 Console Sites

MCC 7500 MCC 7500
Feature Manual Bk.2: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console
Elite Admin Elite Dispatch
Bk.3: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Subsystem and Audio Logging
Software Software
Bk.4: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Subsystem and Conventional Analog Operation
User’s Guide User’s Guide
6866600D41 Bk.5: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Subsystem and Bandwidth Management
6802800U43 6802800U44
Quick Reference Guides Feature Manuals
Managing Radio Managing the Server and Telephone Data

Users, Radios, Infrastructure NM Client Interconnect Feature Manual
Talkgroups Quick Quick Reference Quick Reference Feature Manual
6866600D49 6866600D50 6866600D47 6866600D43 6866600D42
Authentication/Encryption
Authentication PCI Crypto

Encryption Card Upgrade
and Provisioning Manual
6866600D45 6881132E24
Provisioning Managing End to End Air Interface

AUC Crypto KMF CryptR
Centre (PrC) Secure Encryption Encryption
Card Instruction Instruction
User Manual Communications KVL3000 Plus KVL3000 Plus
Manual Manual
6802800U40 6802800U71 6866600D46 6866600D22 6802800U14 6802800U15
Online Help
Affiliation Display Online Help Performance Reports Online Help RCM Online Help Zone Watch Online Help
Application Launcher Online Help - Historical reports RCM Reports Online Help System and Zone Profile Online Help
Authentication Centre Online Help - Dynamic Reports Software Download Online Help KMF Online Help
FullVision Online Help - ATIA Log Viewer UCM Online Help TESS Online Help
ZCM Online Help MCC7500 Online Help
Dimetra IP Fault Bk.1: Fault Management Configuration Bk.1: User Configuration Manager
Differences Man,
System Management Bk.2: FullVision Management Bk.2: Zone Configuration Manager
Dimetra IP
Overview Bk.3: Zone Watch Bk.3: Configuring Features
2004/5 to
Bk.4: System and Zone Bk.4: Software Download
Dimetra IP 2007
6866600D10 6866600D11 Profile 6866600D12
6866600D31
Radio and Bk.1: Radio Management Master Site Bk.1: Master Site Overview
Security
Radio User Bk.2: Affiliation Display Core Elements Bk.2: Call Processing Subsystem
Management
management Bk.3: ATIA Log Viewer Bk.3: Network Transport Subsystem
Bk.4: Radio Control Manager Bk.3-1: Master Site LAN Switch
Bk.5: Radio Control Manager Reports Bk.3-2: Cooperative WAN Routing
6866600D13 Bk.6: Fleetmapping 6866600D15 6866600D16 Bk.3-3: Master Site Routers
Bk.3-4: Router Manager
Bk.3-5: Network Transport Management Server
Bk.3-6: Active Directory/Domain Name Services
Performance Bk.1: Performance Management Backup/Restore Dimetra IP Bk.4: Network Management Subsystem
Management Bk.2: Dynamic Reports Including Glossary Bk.4-1: Private Network Management Servers
Bk.3: Historical Reports FRU/FRE Bk.4-2: Private Network Management Client
Bk.4: InfoVista Bk.5: Remote Access
6866600D20 6802800U86 Bk.6: Network Time Server
6866600D14
Feature Manuals Tools
Alias Integrated Data Telephone MultiCADI Backup/Restore UCS

Solution (AIS) Feature Manual Interconnect Feature Manual Collector Synchronisation
Feature Manual Feature Manual Application Tool Manual
User Guide
6866600D26 6866600D18 6866600D28 6866600D62 6866600D19 6802800U62
Authentication End to End Air Interface

Encryption Encryption Encryption
and Provisioning KVL3000 Plus KVL3000 Plus
6866600D21 6802800U14 6802800U15
Network Managing Provisioning PCI Crypto AUC Crypto

KMF CryptR
Security Secure Centre (PrC) Card Upgrade Card Instruction
Instruction
Feature Manual Communications User Manual Manual Manual
Manual
6866600D32 6866600D25 6802800U40 6881132E24 6866600D22 6802800U71

Application Launcher Online Help
MCC 7500 MCC 7500 Authentication Centre Online Help
Elite Admin Elite Dispatch Performance Reports Online Help
Software Software - Historical reports
- Dynamic Reports
User’s Guide User’s Guide - ATIA Log Viewer
6802800U43 6802800U44 FullVision Online Help
RCM Online Help
Bk.1: MCC 7500 Console Sites Software Download Online Help
MCC 7500 UCM Online Help
Bk.2: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console
Feature Manual ZCM Online Help
Bk.3: MCC 7500 ICCS Gateway Subsystem
Bk.4: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Subsystem and Audio Logging ZoneWatch Online Help
Bk.5: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Subsystem and Conventional Analog Operation System and Zone Profile Online Help
6866600D17 Bk.6: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Subsystem and Bandwidth Management
KMF Online Help
Bk.7: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Subsystem Interoperability
TESS Online Help
MCC7500 Online Help
Dimetra IP Compact / Scalable Dimetra IP
Understanding Fault Configuration Booklet 1: Managing Zone Infrastructure Monitoring

your System Management Management Booklet 2: Managing Radio Users System
Booklet 3: Administering Servers, and Controllers Performance
Booklet 4: Administering Databases
6802800U76 6802800U77 6802800U78 Booklet 5: Feature Configuration 6802800U79
Booklet 6: Fleetmap Management
Security Authentication, Managing Dimetra IP

Diagnostics Booklet 1: Installation and Configuration
Management Encryption and Secure Glossary
and Booklet 2: Managing Authentication,
Provisioning Communication
Troubleshooting Encryption and Provisioning
6802800U80 6802800U81 6802800U82 6802800U83 6802800U86
Feature Manuals
Booklet 1: MCC 7500 Console Sites

System Wide Data MCC 7500 Booklet 2: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Telephone
Backup and Feature Feature Booklet 3: Audio Logging Interconnect
Restore Manual Manual Manual Booklet 4: Analog Conventional for Feature Manual
MCC 7500 Dispatch Consoles
6802800U84 6802800U92 6802800U94 Booklet 5: Bandwidth Management 6802800U93
KMF AUC End to End Air Interface KVL 3000 Plus Provisioning
PCI Short Form PCI
Crypto Card Crypto Card Encryption Encryption key Variable Centre (PrC)
Crypto Card Crypto Card
Instruction Instruction KVL3000 Plus KVL3000 Plus Loader User's Manual
Service Manual Upgrade Manual
Manual Manual User Guide User Guide Service Manual
6802700U92 6881132E24 6881003Y85 6802800U71 6802800U14 6802800U15 6802800U68 6802800U40
Console Manuals Quick Reference Guide
System Managing Radio Managing the Server and

MCC 7500 MCC 7500
Reference Users, Radios, Infrastructure NM Client
Administrator Dispatch
Guide Talkgroups Quick Quick Reference Quick Reference
User´s Guide User´s Guide
6802800U43 6802800U44 6802800U88 6802800U90 6802800U91 6802800U85
Online Help
Affiliation Application Authentication Performance FullVision RCM RCM

Display launcher Centre Reports Online Help Online Help Reports
Online Help Online Help Online Help Online Help Online Help
Software UCM ZCM ZoneWatch System and KMF TESS

Download Online Help Online Help Online Help Zone Profile Online Help Online Help
Online Help Online Help
Booklet 3-1: Managing Zone Infrastructure
Booklet 3-2: Managing Radio Users
Volume 1 Volume 2 Volume 3 Booklet 3-3: Administering Servers, Volume 4
Understanding Fault Configuration Controllers and Gateways Accounting
your Dimetra IP Management Management Booklet 3-4: Managing Network Transport Equipment Management
System Booklet 3-5: Administering Databases
Booklet 3-6: Feature Configuration
6802800U51 6802800U52 6802800U53 Booklet 3-7: Fleetmap Management 6802800U54
Volume 5 Volume 7 Volume 8

Booklet 5-1: Monitoring System Volume 6
Performance High Level Field Replace-
Performance Security
Management Diagnostics and able Units
Booklet 5-2: Managing Network Transport Management
Troubleshooting and Entities
Equipment Performance
6802800U55 6802800U56 6802800U57 6802800U58
Booklet 9-1: Master Site

Volume 9 Volume 11
Hardware Installation Volume 10 Booklet 10-1: Authentication, Encryption and
Installation and End-to-End
Booklet 9-2: Master Site Authentication, Provisioning - Installation and
Configuration Secure
Software Installation Encryption and Configuration
Communications
Booklet 9-3: Network Transport Applications Provisioning Booklet 10-2: Managing Authentication,
6802800U59 Installation and Configuration 6802800U60 Encryption and Provisioning 6802800U61
Security/Authentication Feature Manuals
PCI Short Form PCI Crypto KMF Crypto Alias Integrated MultiCADI UCS
Crypto Card Card Upgrade Card Instruction Solution (AIS) Feature Synchronisation
Service Manual Manual Manual Feature Manual Manual Tool Manual
6802700U92 6881132E24 6881003Y85 6802800U66 6802800U67 6802800U62
AUC Crypto End to End Air Interface Backup/Restore Network Telephone

Card Instruction Encryption Encryption Collector Security Interconnect
Manual KVL3000 Plus KVL3000 Plus Application Feature Manual Feature Manual
User Guide User Guide User Guide
6802800U71 6802800U14 6802800U15 6802800U22 6802800U70 6802800U65
KVL 3000 Plus Provisioning Data MCC 7500

key Variable Centre Users Feature Manual Feature Manual
Loader Service Manual
Manual
6802800U69 6802800U64
6802800U68 6802800U40
Online Help


Booklet 3-1: Managing Zone Infrastructure
Booklet 3-2: Managing Radio Users
Volume 1 Volume 2 Volume 3 Booklet 3-3: Administering Servers, Volume 4
Understanding Fault Configuration Controllers and Gateways Accounting
your Dimetra IP Management Management Booklet 3-4: Managing Network Transport Equipment Management
System Booklet 3-5: Administering Databases
Booklet 3-6: Feature Configuration
6802800U27 6802800U28 6802800U29 Booklet 3-7: Fleetmap Management 6802800U30
Volume 5 Volume 7 Volume 8

Booklet 5-1: Monitoring System Volume 6
Performance High Level Field Replace-
Performance Security
Management Diagnostics and able Units
Booklet 5-2: Managing Network Transport Management
Troubleshooting and Entities
Equipment Performance
6802800U31 6802800U32 6802800U33 6802800U34
Booklet 9-1: Master Site

Volume 9 Hardware Installation Volume 11
Volume 10 Booklet 10-1: Authentication, Encryption and
Installation and Booklet 9-2: Master Site End-to-End
Authentication, Provisioning - Installation and
Configuration Software Installation Secure
Encryption and Configuration
Booklet 9-3: Master Site Configuration Communications
Provisioning Booklet 10-2: Managing Authentication,
Booklet 9-4: Network Transport Applications
6802800U35 6802800U36 Encryption and Provisioning 6802800U37
Installation and Configuration
Security/Authentication Feature Manuals
PCI Short Form PCI Crypto KMF Crypto Alias Integrated MultiCADI UCS
Crypto Card Card Upgrade Card Instruction Solution (AIS) Feature Synchronisation
Service Manual Manual Manual Feature Manual Manual Tool Manual
6802700U92 6881132E24 6881003Y85 6802800U50 6802800U63 6802700U94
AUC Crypto End to End Air Interface Backup/Restore Network Telephone

Card Instruction Encryption Encryption Collector Security Interconnect
Manual KVL3000 Plus KVL3000 Plus Application Feature Manual Feature Manual
User Guide User Guide User Guide
6802800U54 6802800U14 6802800U15 6802800U22 6802800U70 6802800U47
KVL 3000 Plus Provisioning Data Centracom

key Variable Centre Users Feature Manual Elite Console
Loader Service Manual Feature Manual
Manual
6802800U48 6802800U42
6880802E55 6802800U40
Online Help


Service Information
EMEA Systems Support Centre (ESSC)
The EMEA Systems Support Centre provides a remote Technical Support Service to help customers resolve
technical issues and quickly restore networks and systems. This team of highly skilled professionals is available
to customers with current service agreements in place that include the Technical Support Service. The ESSC
technical experts may be accessed through the EMEA Integrated Call Center either electronically or using the
telephone numbers listed below. If you are unsure as to whether or not your current service agreement entitles
you to benefit from this service, or if you would like more information about the Technical Support Service,
please contact your local customer support or account manager for further information.
Contact details:are:
Email: ESSC@motorola.com
List of Telephone numbers:

Country In Country Number to Dial
AUSTRIA 01206091087
DENMARK 043682114
FRANCE 0157323434
GERMANY 06950070204
ITALY 0291483230
LITHUANIA 880 030 828
NETHERLANDS 0202061404
NORWAY 24159815
PORTUGAL 0217616160
810 800 228 41044
RUSSIA
(Alternative 810 800 120 1011)
SAUDI ARABIA 800 844 5345
SOUTH AFRICA 0800981900
SPAIN 0912754787
UNITED KINGDOM 02030 277499
All Other Countries +44 2030 277499
European Systems Component Centre (ESCC)

The European Systems Component Centre provides a repair service for infrastructure equipment. Customers
requiring repair service should contact the Customer Information Desk to obtain a Return Material Authorisation
number. The equipment should then be shipped to the following address unless advised otherwise.
Motorola GmbH, European Systems Component Centre, Am Borsigturm 130,13507 Berlin, Germany
Contact details:
E-Mail: ESCC.admin@motorola.com
Telephone: +49 (0) 30 66861555
Telefax: +49 (0) 30 66861426
Monday - Friday 08:00 am to 06:00 pm (CET)
Parts Identification and Ordering

Request for help in identification of non-referenced spare parts should be directed to the Customer Care
Organization of Motorola’s local area representation. Orders for replacement parts, kits and assemblies should
be placed directly on Motorola’s local distribution organization or via the Extranet site Motorola Online at
https://emeaonline.motorola.com.
EMEA Test Equipment Support
Information related to support and service of Motorola Test Equipment is available by calling the Motorola Test
Equipment Service Group in Germany at +49 (0) 6128 702179, Telefax +49 (0) 6128 951046, through the
Customer Care Organization of Motorola’s local area representation, or via the Internet at
http://www.gd-decisionsystems.com/cte/.
Your Input
...is much appreciated. If you have any comments, corrections, suggestions or ideas for this publication or any
other requirements regarding Motorola publications, please send an e-mail to doc.emea@motorola.com.
Updated Versions of this Manual

......are available at our Extranet site Motorola Online. Contact us at doc.emea@motorola.com for access.
Document
History
Document History
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Edition Description Date

68P02700U57–C Manual updated to comply with Dimetra 5.2. Sept. 2004
The following major items have changed:
Structure of manual changed
Index added
Status Bar description updated
Connection Menu updated with Connect Direct, Connect Modem,
and Connect Telnet
Site Controller - Site Reference parameters updated
Under Serving Cell, Local Time Offset parameters added
Input and Output Contacts added
Dimetra Network IP Address Plan updated
68P02700U57–D Manual updated to comply with Dimetra 5.5. Oct. 2005
Under “Log On Screen” 5.5 releases inserted.
Under “Serving Cell — Packet Data Parameters”, note inserted that
these parameters are invisible and therefore not used for 5.5 and
higher.
Using Help Command section deleted
68P02700U57–E Manual updated to comply with Dimetra 6.0. June 2006
Under “Log On Screen” Motorola Dimetra R6.0 options added.
New communication method, using TFTP, has been added throughout
the document.
Information related to MTS2 and MTS4 added.
68P02700U57–F The manual front matter has been up-issued to reflect that it covers Sept. 2006
Dimetra IP Compact / Scalable Dimetra IP
68P02700U57–G Updated the following parameters: Oct. 2006
NSC Operation Mode
68P02700U57–H Manual updated to comply with Dimetra 6.1. Jun. 2007
6802700U57-W October 2010 i

Document History

Added information related to Network Time Protocol
Updated parameters and default values related to GPS
6802700U57–J • Under “Log On Screen” and “Create Personality Dialog Box” Mar. 2008
Motorola Dimetra R6.2 options added.
• Default Tx Power Level changes made under “Base Radio -
RF Parameters”.
• XHUB Installed parameter description added to Site
Configuration.
6802700U57–K Updated No Trunking BS Service Details section June 2008
6802700U57–L Updated the following sections: Oct. 2008
• GPS Start Up Time Out
• GPS RAIM Enable
• Reference Signal Source
• Setting TSC file versions
6802700U57–M Updated the following sections: Mar. 2009
• Alarms - Communications: Threshold Timer
• Serving Cell - Disclaimer Message
• No Trunking BS Service Details
• GPS Start Up Time Out
• Reference Source Signal
• S(hort) D(ata) R(outer) IP Address
6802700U57–N Added the following sections: June 2009
• Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link
• Ethernet Site Link Messages
• Site Controller - Performance Monitoring Parameters
Updated the following sections:
• Log On Screen
• Site Configuration
6802700U57–P Updated the following sections: Oct. 2009
• Log On Screen
• Serving Cell - Traffic Channel Parameters
• Site Controller - BRC Interface Parameters
• Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link Network Parameters
ii 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Document History

6802700U57–R Updated the following sections: Jan. 2010
• Site Controller - General Parameters
• Site Controller - Site Link Parameters
• Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link
• Ethernet Site Link Tab
6802700U57–T Updated the following sections: Aug. 2010
• Log On Screen
• BTS Types: EBTS, MBTS, MTS 4, MTS 2, MTS 1
• Base Radio - General Parameters
6802700U57–U Added the following sections: Sept. 2010
• Site Controller - Local Gateway Parameters
Updated the following sections:
• Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link General Parameters
• Site Controller - Voice Parameters
6802700U57–W Updated the following sections: Oct. 2010
• Site Controller - Site Reference
6802700U57-W October 2010 iii

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide
This page intentionally left blank.
iv 6802700U57-W October 2010

Table
of
Contents
Contents
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Icon Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -xv
Style Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -xvi
Chapter 1: Introduction
Development Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Minimum System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Password Usage and Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Site Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Serving Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Adjacent Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Base Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Communication with the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Downloading Files to the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Configuration Upload from the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Diagnostics File Upload from the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Keyboard Shortcuts – Operation Without a Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Status Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Log On Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
BTS Types: EBTS, MBTS, MTS 4, MTS 2, MTS 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Chapter 2: Service Software Operation

Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
New Command (File Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Open Command (File Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Save Command (File Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Save As Command (File Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
File Import Command (File Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
File Export Command (File Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Print Command (File Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Print Preview Command (File Menu). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Print Setup Command (File Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
1,2,3,4 Command (File Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Exit Command (File Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
6802700U57-W October 2010 v

View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Toolbar (View Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Status Bar Command (View Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Personality Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Modify Command (Personality Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Print to File (Personality Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Site Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Serving Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Serving Cell - Access Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Serving Cell - Traffic Channel Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Serving Cell - System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Alarm Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Disclaimer Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Serving Cell - Reselection Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Serving Cell - Carrier Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Serving Cell - Security Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Serving Cell - Packet Data Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Serving Cell - RF Immunity Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Serving Cell - KEK Data Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Serving Cell - SCK Data Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Site Controller - General Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Cell State Timers - State Management (Site Controller - General Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Site Controller - Site Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Site Controller - NTP Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Site Controller - Address Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Site Controller - Address Range Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Site Controller - BRC Interface Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Site Controller - Master Site Interface Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Site Controller - Site Router Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Site Controller - Site Link Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link General Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link QOS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Site Controller - BFD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link Encryption Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Site Controller - Local Gateway Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Site Controller - Call Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Site Controller - Short Data Transport Service Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Site Controller - Voice Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Site Controller - Packet Data Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Site Controller - Network Management Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
Base Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
Base Radio - General Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
Base Radio - RF Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Adjacent Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
Connection menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
Entering Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
Connect Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
Connect Direct (Connection menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
In Direct Connection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
Connect Modem (Connection menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
In Modem Connection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
Connect Telnet (Connection menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
vi 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Contents
Connect Telnet New (Connection menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118

Connect Telnet From Personality (Connection menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
Connect Telnet Site History (Connection menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
In Telnet Connection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
Telnet Connection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
Close Connection (Connection menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
Dialing Directory (Connection menu). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
Log To File (Connection menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
Stop Logging (Connection Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
Hang Up (Connection Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
Send Files (Connection Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
Upload Diagnostics (Connection Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124
Upload Configuration (Connection Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-125
File Transfer Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
Data Transfer Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
Direct Routing Command (Configuration Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
Direct Settings Command (Configuration Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
Modem Settings Command (Configuration Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
Modem Routing Command (Configuration Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
Passwords Command (Configuration Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
Access Configuration Command (Configuration menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
Contents Command (Help Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
Search Command (Help Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
About Command (Help Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
Context Help Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
Chapter 3: Informative Reports, Errors and Warnings

Personality Screen Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Site Configuration (Top Level) Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Confirm Addition of New Base Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Confirm Deletion of Existing Base Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Confirm Deletion of Existing Adjacent Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Confirm Clearing eMTS Installed Checkbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Confirm Lack of Support for Standby BR on the eTETRA MTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Confirm Addition of New Adjacent Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Incorrect Data Value Entered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Disclaimer Message Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Channel Number Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Reset Site Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Site Description Error or Site Version Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Ethernet Site Link Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Ethernet Site Link Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Ethernet Site Link Tab - Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Ethernet Site Link Tab - QOS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link Local Gateway Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Site Link Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
General File Access Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Configuration Version Not Accepted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Configuration File Version Not Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Data File Read Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Opening a .cf File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Save Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
6802700U57-W October 2010 vii

Read Only Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Saving Previously Generated Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Unrecognized Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Unrecognized File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Unrecognized File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Configuration Not Saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Communication Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Discard Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Modem Initialization Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Modem Dialing Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Modem Connection Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Serial Port Not Detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Too Many Characters in Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Unable to Configure Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Undetermined Modem Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
VT100 Logging Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
File Download Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Data Generation and Decoding Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Configuration File Compilation Failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Duplicate Cabinet ID Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Decoding Configuration Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Carrier Number Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Path Delay Threshold Parameter out of Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
GPS Signal Lost Timer invalid value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Serial Communications Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Unrecognized Object IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
General Application Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Internal Application Configuration Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Password Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Scroll Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Size Command (System Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Maximize Command (System Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Close Command (System Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Restore Command (System Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Switch to Command (System Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
System Unstable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Path Delay Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
TETRA Group ID Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
TETRA Individual ID Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Duplicate Carrier Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Duplicate Main Carrier Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Duplicate DLCI Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Invalid Deleted Adjacent Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Configuration Not Sent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Ethernet Site Parameters Not Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Extended TX Base Frequency Out Of Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Chapter 4: Windows Reference

Create Personality Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
File Open Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
File Save As Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Files and Directories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
viii 6802700U57-W October 2010

Print Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Print Progress Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Print Preview Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Print Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Options Command (Configuration Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
General Settings (Options screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
File Transfer Settings (Options screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
System Manager Password Screen (Level 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
TSC File Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Setting TSC File Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Establishing a Communications Link with the TSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
6802700U57-W October 2010 ix

x 6802700U57-W October 2010

List
of
Figures
List of Figures
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Figure 1-1: TESS Log On Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Figure 2-1: Main Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
6802700U57-W October 2010 xi

List of Figures
xii 6802700U57-W October 2010

About
This
Manual
TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User

Guide
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
This manual is an introduction and guide to the use of the Dimetra™ BTS (Base Transceiver
System) Service Software. Through the Dimetra BTS Service Software trained service personnel
and systems engineers can configure and program a BTS.
What is Covered In This Manual?

Chapter 1 contains introductory information on getting you started.
Chapter 2 contains menu descriptions and detailed definitions of all the parameters
configurable by the Service Software.
Chapter 3 contains a number of different warnings and messages.
Chapter 4 contains different dialog boxes.
6802700U57-W October 2010 xiii

About This Manual
Helpful Background Information

This manual is intended for personnel responsible for installing and configuring BTSs, typically
Technicians, and System Managers. It is assumed that the user is familiar with Motorola
Dimetra trunked radio equipment or similar types of equipment.
The Motorola technical training team offers various courses designed to assist you in learning about
your system. The following is a listing of some of the course offerings available.
Course Description
EBTS PR3.0 Installation, Configuration, This course is divided into six modules and includes
Troubleshooting & Maintenance the theoretical and practical aspects of maintenance and
Troubleshooting Course (Instructor led) troubleshooting EBTS in a Dimetra system. The course
includes the practical use of service software and the
Man-Machine Interface. Practical sessions include the
removal and replacement of Field Replaceable Units (FRU).
MTS 2/4 Installation, Configuration, This course is divided into seven modules and includes the
Troubleshooting and Maintenance theoretical and practical aspects of configuring, maintaining
(Instructor led) and troubleshooting the MTS base station in a Dimetra IP
system. The course includes the practical use of service
software and the man-machine interface. Practical sessions
include the removal and replacement of Field Replaceable
Units (FRU).
Related Information
In addition to the information in the table below, see the Related Information Guide.
Related Information Purpose
Standards and Guidelines for Provides standards and guidelines that should be followed
Communication Sites (68P81089E50) when setting up a Motorola communications site. Also
known as R56 manual.
Dimetra IP System Overview This manual provides basic radio system concepts, call
processing basics, and an introduction to the various
components and processes associated with the Dimetra
IP system. The manual provides the background needed
to comprehend the theory of operation and it provides
equipment/subsystem functional descriptions. It also
describes the role of the numerous network management
software applications used for managing the system.
EBTS Installation, Configuration and This manual describes all necessary actions to install,
Basic Service Manual configure and maintain the Enhanced Base Transceiver
Systems (EBTS) within the Dimetra IP System.
xiv 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Icon Conventions
Related Information Purpose

MBTS Installation, Configuration and This manual describes all necessary actions to install,
Basic Service Manual configure and maintain the Mini Base Transceiver Systems
(MBTS) within the Dimetra IP System.
MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, This manual describes all necessary actions to install,
Configuration and Basic Service Manual configure and maintain the Motorola Transceiver Station 2
and 4 (MTS 2 and MTS 4) within the Dimetra IP System.
MTS Man Machine Interface Commands This manual describes the Man-Machine Interface
Manual commands used to test and configure MTS Sites
Dimetra IP Glossary This glossary document gives a detail run down of terms
connected with TETRA and Dimetra used within the Dimetra
documentation set.
Icon Conventions
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The document set is designed to give the reader more visual cues. The following graphic icons are used
throughout the documentation set. These icons and their associated meanings are described below.
SUGGESTION
A Suggestion implies a recommendation or tip from Motorola, which does not require to be
followed, but may be helpful. There is no warning level associated with a Suggestion.
Notes contain information that is more important than the surrounding text, such as exceptions or
preconditions. Also, refer the reader elsewhere for additional information, remind the reader how
to complete an action (when it is not part of the current procedure, for instance), or tell the reader
where information is located on the screen. There is no warning level associated with a Note.
An Important icon indicates information that is crucial to the discussion at hand, but which is
not a Caution or a Warning. There is no warning level associated with the Important icon.
6802700U57-W October 2010 xv

Style Conventions
The Caution icon implies information that must be carried out in a certain manner
to avoid problems, procedures that may or may not be necessary as determined
by the reader’s system configuration, and so on. Although no damage occurs if
the reader does not heed the caution, some steps may need repeating.
The signal word CAUTION may be used without the safety icon to state
potential damage or injury that is not related to the product.
The Warning icon implies potential system damage if the instructions or

procedures are not carried out exactly, or if the warning is not heeded.
The Danger icon implies information that, if disregarded, may result in severe
injury or death of personnel. This is the highest level of warning.
Style Conventions
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The following style conventions are used:
Convention Description
Bold This typeface is used for names of, for instance, windows, buttons,
and labels when these names appear on the screen (example: the
Alarms Browser window). When it is clear that we are referring to,
for instance, a button, the name is used alone (example: Click OK).
Monospacing font in This typeface is used for words to be typed in exactly as they
bold are shown in the text (example: In the Address field, type
http://ucs01.ucs:9080/)
Monospacing font This typeface is used for messages, prompts, and other text displayed
on the computer screen (example: A new trap destination
has been added).
xvi 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Style Conventions
Convention Description
Monospacing font in This typeface is used with angle brackets for words to be substituted
bold Italic by a specific member of the group that the words represent (example:
<router number>).
In sequences to be typed in, the angle brackets are

omitted to avoid confusion as to whether the angle
brackets are to be included in the text to be typed.
Arial bold This typeface is used for keyboard keys (example: Press Y, and then
press Enter).
> A > (right angle bracket) is used for indicating the menu or tab
structure in instructions on how to select a certain menu item
(example: File > Save) or a certain sub-tab.
6802700U57-W October 2010 xvii

Style Conventions
xviii 6802700U57-W October 2010

Chapter
1
Introduction
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The Dimetra BTS Service Software, also known as TETRA EBTS Service Software (TESS), has
been developed for the Motorola Dimetra Base Transceiver System (BTS).
The BTS Service Software has the following features:
• Entry of configuration data for a BTS
• Generation of configuration files for use by the BTS
• VT100 terminal emulation for communication with the BTS
• Connection to the BTS via direct serial connection, remote modem link, or IP Network.
• Password entry control
• Three levels of parameter and menu item access control
• Extensive on-line help facility
Development Information
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The BTS Service Software has been developed to operate under the
Microsoft Windows XP
operating system, on a PC having the following or greater specification:
Minimum System Requirements

Processor: Intel Pentium/Celeron family or AMD K6/Athlon/Duron family.
Memory: 64 MB (128 MB or more recommended).
Printer Port: Centronics compatible parallel port or serial port.
Keyboard: a standard PC Keyboard with a key layout for Roman script.
6802700U57-W October 2010 1-1

Getting Started Chapter 1: Introduction
Mouse: PC Mouse or compatible pointing device (highly recommended).

Hard Disk Storage: 8 MB minimum free for BTS Service Software installation, 6 MB minimum working
space for BTS Service Software application, diagnostic, and configuration files.
CD-ROM Drive: MPC2-compatible CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive (standard)
Video Display:Super VGA or higher-resolution video adapter capable of displaying 256
colors or greater at 800*600 screen resolution or higher.
For EBTS and MBTS, Serial Port: 1 free - RS232 compatible, with an operating speed of at
least 19200 baud (Note: USB-to-Serial adapter can be used).
For MTS4, MTS2 and MTS1, Network Interface Card connected to the Dimetra IP Network.
Getting Started
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
This section provides an introduction and informative guide to the use of this BTS Service Software. The main
functions of the BTS Service Software and the normal mode of operation are described in sufficient detail to
enable a new user to be able to use the BTS Service Software to enter configuration data and, program a BTS.
Password Usage and Access Control

The BTS Service Software provides password access control on entry to the package. Three separate
levels of access are provided. The three levels have no implied priority order. A default configuration for
each access level is supplied. A qualified Motorola service engineer is required to modify it.
Please contact your Motorola Service Center in order to obtain the default
passwords for any access level.
The passwords are modified from Configuration -> "Passwords Command (Configuration Menu)". This
feature allows the user to change the password for the access level of the current login. A screen is
provided in which the new password is entered and then re-entered to confirm the change.
The Log On Screen is displayed every time the application is started. The user should select the system
release required from the pick list, enter the password required or supplied then press ENTER.
If there is no match with any of access level passwords a user-friendly message is displayed allowing the
user to try again. If the user presses CANCEL the BTS Service Software is terminated.
1-2 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Configuration
Configuration
The BTS Service Software stores a complete BTS site configuration in a single file with a .cfg extension.
This file contains configuration data for the BTS as a whole, Site Controller specific, and Base Radio
specific parameters. When the BTS Service Software is started all parameters are set to their default values
and the filename is set to untitled.cfg. The configuration data is modified with the personality screens
accessed by selecting personality on the main menu or tool bar. If the BTS Service Software has been used
to read files or if the Personality screens have already been accessed the default state can be set by using
the File->New menu option or the Reset Site Data button on the Site Configuration screen.
When complete the configuration should be saved to disk using the File->Save As menu option. At this point
a more appropriate filename may be selected by the user. It is suggested that the user creates a directory
structure for the storage of files before beginning data entry. The method for creating directories is not
covered in this guide, but details can be found in the PC operating system user manual. Filenames should be
chosen to enable configuration files for different sites to be differentiated. The BTS Service Software does
provide a mechanism whereby a short description and version number are embedded within the configuration
data file. This information is not used by the BTS but is displayed to the user when using File->Open thus
allows the user to differentiate easily between files without opening the file and examining the data.
The configuration data is divided into four logical groups. The top-level screen and the four
logical groups are described in the following sections.
Site Configuration
The Site Configuration screen is the top-level personality configuration screen and provides access to all
the screens required to complete a full configuration. A site title field is provided for the user to give a
more meaningful description of the site than can be contained in the file name. A version number field
allows the user to version control his configuration data files if required. The BTS Service Software
displays the description and version in the file open screen when a file is selected. This approach allows
the user to identify the required file without opening the file and examining the contents in detail. The
Site Configuration screen allows access to the Site Controller specific parameter screens, Serving Cell
parameter screens, Adjacent Site parameter screens and Base Radio parameter screens. Buttons are provided
to enable Adjacent Channels and Base Radios to be added to and deleted from the site configuration.
The Add button always adds an instance (adjacent channel or Base Radio) to the end of the current list,
where as the Delete deletes the instance currently shown in the pull down list box.
Since the Dimetra IP Release 6.2, parameters connected with the Adjacent Sites
cannot be viewed, added, deleted, or edited.
Site Controller
The Site Controller configuration screens contain parameters specific to the Site Controller.
The parameters are divided in following categories:
• The General screen contains general Site Controller parameters.
• The Site Reference screen contains parameters related to external references.
6802700U57-W October 2010 1-3

Serving Cell Chapter 1: Introduction
• The Network Time Protocol screen contains parameters specific to the oper-
ation of Network Time Protocol service.
• The Addresses and Address Ranges screens contain system address param-
eters such as valid radio identity ranges.
• The Base Radio Controller (BRC) screen contains parameters related to the
interface between the Site Controller and the BRC.
• The BRC is the control unit within the Base Radio.
• The Master Site screen contains parameters related to the interface be-
tween the BTS and the Master Site.
• The Calls screen contains call processing specific parameters such as call timers.
• The SDTS and Packet Data screens contain parameters related to short
data and packet data features respectively.
• The Voice screen contains parameters for controlling voice transportation in the system.
• The Network Management screen contains parameters specific to the op-
eration of Network Management.
• The Site Router screen contains parameters for controlling the low-level
transport protocols used on the site link.
• The Site Link screen contains address configuration data.
• The Ethernet Site Link screen contains parameters specific for the Eth-
ernet Site Link configuration.
Serving Cell
The Serving Cell screens contain parameters, which are common to all the Base Radios or to both the
Site Controller and the Base Radios within the BTS. The parameters are divided into ten categories,
Mobile Station system Access Parameters, Traffic Channel Parameters, common System Parameters,
Reselection Parameters, Base Radio Carrier Parameters, general Security Parameters, security KEK
Data, security SCK Data, Packet Data Parameters, and RF Immunity Parameters.
Adjacent Channel
The Adjacent Channel parameters screen contains parameters transmitted to the Mobile Stations
(MSs) to inform them of the cells adjacent to the cell they are currently receiving. This information
allows the MS to quickly find an alternative cell when it moves out of range of the current
transmitter. The number of Adjacent Channels currently in the BTS is controlled from the main
personality screen using the Add and Delete Adjacent Channel buttons.
Since the Dimetra IP Release 6.2, parameters connected with the Adjacent Sites
cannot be viewed, added, deleted, or edited.
1-4 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Base Radio
Base Radio
The Base Radio configuration screens contain parameters, which are specific to a particular Base Radio within
the BTS. Screens are provided for General Parameters and RF specific Parameters. The number of Base
Radios in the BTS is controlled from the main personality screen using the Add and Delete Base Radio buttons.
Communication with the BTS

The BTS Service Software is able to establish a communications link with the BTS with a
direct serial line connection or, for remote access, via a modem link or LAN/WAN connection
(depending on the Release version). The BTS Service Software provides the following
configuration screens under the Configuration menu:
• Direct Settings (Shortcut: Ctrl + D)
• Modem Settings (not available for MTS and for Dimetra 6.1 and higher)
To set the desired communications mode, select one of the below (only available for D5.1 and lower):
• Direct Routing
• Modem Routing
To initiate the connection (once the options are configured), from the Connection menu, select:
• Connect (only available for Dimetra 5.1 and lower)
• Connect Direct (available for Dimetra 5.2 and higher)
• Connect Modem (not available for MTS and Dimetra 6.1and higher)
• Connect Telnet (available for Dimetra 5.2 and higher)
The VT100 terminal emulation is provided to enable instructions to be sent to the BTS and for
responses to be displayed. Dedicated buttons are provided for the most frequently used operations,
namely, downloading files to the BTS, uploading configuration files from the BTS, and uploading
diagnostics data from the BTS. These operations are described in detail in the following sections. See
"Establishing a Communications Link with the TSC" for further information.
Downloading Files to the BTS

When installing a new site, upgrading a software component or modifying the configuration of a BTS, it is
necessary to transfer the files to the BTS. The BTS Service Software is able to communicate with the BTS via
a modem connection, via a direct serial line connection or via Ethernet connection (using TFTP protocol). The
configuration and setting up of the communication link is covered in the previous section "Communication
with the BTS". Once connected the Send Files button or menu option is selected, the user is prompted to select
between sending a configuration and sending application files. Once a transfer type is selected, a window is
displayed allowing the user to navigate directories and select files to be transmitted. Files may only be selected
from a single directory, when the directory is changed the selected list is cleared. If the user selected to send a
configuration, the configuration file is compiled. A complete set of compiled configuration files includes a .sc1
file and a set of files with extensions .b01, .b02, and so on, one for each Base Radio in the BTS. The application
files are normally stored in a different directory and are necessary to be sent separately. Application files have
6802700U57-W October 2010 1-5

Configuration Upload from the BTS Chapter 1: Introduction
extensions .tsc, .brc and .x21. Not all users have access to this feature. Once a set of files has been selected
they are transferred automatically to the BTS when the OK button is selected. A transfer progress window
is displayed to indicate file transfer progress and errors detected. A transfer status window is displayed on
completion to indicate the result of the file transfer request. If TESS does not recognize the parameters they
are saved and transferred anyway. See "Send Files (Connection Menu)" for further information.
Configuration Upload from the BTS

The BTS Service Software is able to upload the existing configuration files from a BTS. Once connected
to the site the Upload Configuration button or menu option can be used to automatically upload the
complete configuration of the BTS (Site Controller and all Base Radios). The configuration is stored
internally for examination via the Personality screens or for saving using the File->Save As menu
option. See "Upload Configuration (Connection Menu)" for further information. A transfer progress
window is displayed to indicate file transfer progress and errors detected. A transfer status window
is displayed on completion to indicate the result of each file transfer requested.
Diagnostics File Upload from the BTS

The BTS Service Software is able to upload diagnostics files from the BTS. Once connected to the site the
Upload Diagnostics button or menu option can be used to automatically upload the diagnostics files from the
BTS. The BTS shall contain three diagnostic files: a short-term log of all events (event_1.log), a long-term log
of major events (event_2.log) and a log of calls (call.log). Upon selecting the upload diagnostics a window is
displayed allowing the user to select the file or files to be uploaded. The diagnostics files are stored in the same
directory as the BTS Service Software application for examination. The BTS Service Software itself is unable
to read or display the contents of the files, however to assist in fault diagnosis the Motorola European System
Maintenance Center may request that the customer upload and store these files for examination. A transfer
progress window is displayed to indicate file transfer progress and errors detected. A transfer status window is
displayed on completion to indicate the result of each file transfer requested. The manual for the Site Controller
should be consulted for details of the diagnostics files generated. This manual is the EBTS PR3.0 Installation,
Configuration & Basic Service Manualfor the EBTS, MBTS 1.0 Installation, Configuration & Basic Service
Manual for the MBTS and MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual for MTS.
See "Upload Diagnostics (Connection Menu)" from the Site Controller for further information.
1-6 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Keyboard Shortcuts – Operation Without a Mouse
Keyboard Shortcuts – Operation Without a Mouse

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The TESS interface is designed to work properly with all keyboard layouts for Roman script.
The BTS Service Software is designed to operate under a Windows environment and as such is most
easily operated using a mouse. However the tool has been developed to allow all operations to be
performed using only a keyboard. When operating the BTS Service Software on a PC without a mouse
the controls can be navigated and exercised using the following keystrokes.
• Menu options can be accessed using the F10 key, the cursor navigation keys and the
ENTER key. Each menu, and subsequently sub menu can also be accessed by the
ALT key in conjunction with a keyboard accelerator for example, ALT + F for the
File menu. The Accelerator key is identified by the underlined character in the menu
title for example, File identifies F to be used for the File menu.
• All menu items have a letter underlined in the name. Depressing this letter in
conjunction with the ALT key accesses this menu directly.
• The ESC key operates as the Cancel button on the screens where this is present.
• The ENTER key triggers the operation of the button that currently has focus
(distinguishable by a thin black box around the button).
• The up/down navigation keys are used to move through lists such as the list of files to open.
• When selecting files to send to, or diagnostics files to upload from, the Site Controller,
multiple file selections can be made by depressing the shift key and using the up/down
navigation keys to select a block of files from the list.
• On the VT100 terminal emulation screen the operation of the buttons can only be
operated with a mouse. No TAB or SHIFT TAB navigation for the buttons is
supported. The functionality of the buttons is duplicated by menu items on the
Connection menu enabled on entry to the connection window
• The screen tabs, also called property pages (on Site Controller, Serving Cell, Options screens,
etc.), are navigated using CTRL + TAB or CTRL + SHIFT + TAB keys.
• TAB and SHIFT TAB are used to navigate around the controls on data entry screens,
which key(s) determines the direction of navigation.
• On/off controls (such as checkboxes) can be toggled by the space bar.
• The ALT + SHIFT keys in conjunction with the up/down cursor keys are used to access the
pull down lists on all of the personality screens. To change a pull down selection use the TAB
or SHIFT TAB navigation keys to highlight the desired drop-down selector, the up/down keys
can subsequently be used to select the required instance. To open up the drop-down selector
press either the up or down arrow key simultaneously with the ALT + SHIFT keys. The
Adjacent Channel and Base Radio drop down selectors launch dialog boxes when the user
changes the selection. You can press the ENTER key to open a dialog box from the list.
• F1 gives access to the extensive context-sensitive help associated with the currently
displayed widow, message box, or highlighted menu item.
• When accessing the online help many of the pages contain hot links to other pages,
the TAB key can be used to cycle through the available hot links and ENTER can
be used to move to the page connected to the selected link.
6802700U57-W October 2010 1-7

Toolbar Chapter 1: Introduction
• When using the online help menu items and the buttons can be accessed using the
ALT key pressed simultaneously with the letter underlined on the button or menu
title, for example, ALT + C for going to the Contents page.
Toolbar
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The toolbar is displayed across the top of the application window, below the menu bar. The toolbar
provides quick mouse access to many tools used in the BTS Service Software,
To hide or display the Toolbar, choose Toolbar from the View menu (ALT, V, T).
Click To
Create a new personality.
Open an existing document. The BTS Service Software displays the Open dialog box, in
which you can locate and open the desired file.
Save the active document or template with its current name. If you have not named the
document, the BTS Service Software displays the Save As dialog box.
Print the active document.
Display full pages.
Modify the current site information.
Display the communication window and allows data transfers. The Icon is active only for
releases D5.1 and older.
Display program information, version number, and copyright.
Display help for pressed buttons, menus and windows.
If the user is not using a mouse, no access to the toolbar is available. This does not
inhibit operation of the BTS Service Software in any way as all the toolbar buttons
replicate functions available from the Main Menu.
1-8 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Status Bar
Status Bar
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the BTS Service Software window. To display or
hide the status bar, use the Status Bar command in the View menu.
Four areas on the status bar described below:
1. Describes actions of menu items as you use the arrow keys to navigate through
menus. This area also shows messages that describe the actions of the toolbar buttons
as you depress them, before releasing them. If after viewing the description of the
toolbar button command you do not wish to execute the command, then release the
mouse button while the pointer is off the toolbar button.
2. Active Dimetra System Mode.
3. Time that has elapsed since the BTS Service Software was started.
4. Active in telnet connection mode. IP address resolution method:
◦ Alias - Alias found in the User Alias File, where the user defines IP addresses
◦ LDAP - IP address found by LDAP search
◦ DNS - IP address found by DNS search
◦ Unknown - Any other case (for example, when the user typed an
IP address in the Alias field)
6802700U57-W October 2010 1-9

Log On Screen Chapter 1: Introduction
Log On Screen
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The Service Software provides multi-release support, so configurations for different Motorola
Dimetra BTS Types and System Releases can be created and edited within the same BTS Service
Software application. Currently supported Dimetra/BTS versions are:
• EBTS/MBTS: R7.2, R7.2 Non Standard,R7.1, R7.1 Non Standard, R7.0, R7.0 Non
Standard, R6.2, R6.2 Non Standard, R6.1, R6.1 Non Standard, R6.0,R6.0 Non
Standard, R5.5, R5.5 Non Standard, R5.5 SCO, R5.2, R5.2 Non Standard, R5.2 SCO,
R5.1, R5.1 Non Standard, R5.1 SCO, R5.0 and R3.7/R3.8
• MTS4/MTS2: R7.2, R7.2 Non Standard, R7.1, R7.1 Non Standard, R7.0, R7.0
Non Standard, R6.2, R6.2 Non Standard, R6.1, R6.1 Non Standard, R6.0,R6.0
Non Standard, R5.2, R5.2 Non Standard, R5.2 SCO
• MTS1: R7.2, R7.2 Non Standard, R7.1, R7.1 Non Standard, R7.0, R7.0
Non Standard, R6.2, R6.2 Non Standard
Figure 1-1 TESS Log On Screen
In the Figure 1-1, it is necessary to specify the type of personality you wish to create, matching the
BTS Type (see next section) and Dimetra System Release deployed at your site:
• Dimetra R7.2
• Dimetra R7.2 Non Standard
• Dimetra R7.1
1-10 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Log On Screen
• Dimetra R7.0
• Dimetra R6.2
• Dimetra R6.1
• Dimetra R6.0
• Dimetra R5.5
• Dimetra R5.5 SCO
• Dimetra R5.2
• Dimetra R5.1
• Dimetra R5.0
• Dimetra R3.7/R3.8
If no personality has been chosen yet (Mode: Undefined), the suggested personality
type to create is "EBTS Dimetra R7.1“.
Once a personality has been selected, the BTS Service Software always indicates the current mode
to the user by printing "Mode: EBTS", "Mode: MBTS", "Mode: MTS 2", "Mode: MTS 1" or
"Mode: MTS 4" followed by the release number in the Status Bar.
For Dimetra IP Micro/Dimetra LiTE systems, the correct logging options are:
• BTS Type: MTS1, MTS2 or MTS4
• System Release: Dimetra R6.2 or newer
LG feature is available for Dimetra IP Micro/Dimetra LiTE systems after selecting

Dimetra R7.1 System Release while launching the application.
Depending on the configuration chosen, some items under the Connection menu are
inactive. For example when MTS mode or Dimetra R6.1 or higher has been chosen
in TESS, the Connect Modem option is unavailable.
6802700U57-W October 2010 1-11

BTS Types: EBTS, MBTS, MTS 4, MTS 2, MTS 1 Chapter 1: Introduction
BTS Types: EBTS, MBTS, MTS 4, MTS 2, MTS 1

Currently following types of Dimetra Base Trunking Stations are supported in TESS software:
• EBTS is the full featured, high power, multiple carrier Base Station.
• MBTS is the economic, high quality downsized version of the Base Station.
• MTS 4 is the new full featured, RoHS compliant, high power, multiple
carrier (up to 4 or 8 carriers) Base Station.
• MTS 2 is the economic, RoHS compliant, version of the Base Station with up to 2 carriers.
• MTS 1 is the new economic, RoHS compliant, version of the Base Station with one carrier.
In Dimetra IP Micro / Dimetra LiTE systems only MTS1, MTS2, and MTS4 are supported.
1-12 6802700U57-W October 2010

Chapter
2
Service Software Operation
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
This chapter contains menu descriptions and detailed definitions of all the parameters
which are configured by the Service Software.
Main Menu
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The Main Menu is a special bar at the top of the BTS Service Software window.
Figure 2-1 Main Menu Bar
The main menu is arranged in a hierarchy. At the top level of the hierarchy is the top-level menu bar, which
contains a list of menus, which in turn contain submenus. The menu names on the menu bar (File, View,
Personality, etc.) represent the main categories of commands that the BTS Service Software provides.
Selecting a menu name from the top-level menu bar opens a submenu whose menu items correspond to
the commands in a category. For example, the menu bar contains a File menu name that, when clicked
by the user, activates a submenu with menu items such as New, Open, and Save.
File Menu
The File Menu contains the following sub-menus:
• "New Command (File Menu)"
• "Open Command (File Menu)"
• "Save Command (File Menu)"
• "Save As Command (File Menu)"
• "File Import Command (File Menu)"
• "File Export Command (File Menu)"
• "Print Command (File Menu)"
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-1

New Command (File Menu) Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
• "Print Preview Command (File Menu)"

• "Print Setup Command (File Menu)"
• "1,2,3,4 Command (File Menu)"
• "Exit Command (File Menu)"
New Command (File Menu)

This menu option, also accessible from the tool bar, is used to create a configuration data file named
'untitled.cfg'. If previous data has not been saved then a message box is displayed (see "Save Changes")
prompting the user to save the data if required. All data is reset to default values when this command is executed.
Use this command to create a document in the BTS Service Software. Select the type of new
Personality you want to create in the "Create Personality Dialog Box" .
You can open an existing document with the "Open Command (File Menu)".
Shortcuts
Toolbar:
Keys: CTRL+N
Open Command (File Menu)

Use this command to open an existing BTS configuration (Personality) file.
You can create new Personalities with the "New Command (File Menu)".
Shortcuts
Toolbar:
Keys: CTRL+O
This menu and toolbar option may be used to open a previously saved configuration (*.cfg)
file or to open a previously generated *.sc1 or *.b?? file.
Opening and Reading Data Files
When opening a configuration (*.cfg) file the data is read into the personality within the BTS Service
Software. The data can then be viewed and modified. As file names may be constrained by your specific
naming conventions, the potential for the descriptive file naming may be restricted. To compensate
for this limitation, a site title and version number can be entered onto the Site Configuration screen.
These are displayed in the File Open window for the currently selected file.
To open a configuration file:
Ensure that the [Files of type:] drop down selector is set to *.cfg. This should always
be the case upon entry to the dialog box.
The File Name and associated file list area are updated to show the files of the currently
chosen type present in the selected directory.
Select the required disk drive from the [Look in:] drop down selector.
Browse the directory structure to find the required directory.
2-2 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Save Command (File Menu)
Either select the required file and press OK or double click the desired file entry.
The file is now read into the data entry screens where it may be printed, viewed, or modified as required.
Opening and Reading Generated Data Files
The BTS Service Software provides a mechanism that allows generated (compiled) files to be read
back into the tool. However the following restriction applies to this process:
Only one file may be read at a time. For example if a *.sc1 file was read in and decoded and
then subsequently a Base Radio (*.b??) file was read in and decoded, all the Site Controller
items that are not contained in the decoded Base Radio file are reset to their default values. This
prevents data from one site configuration being mixed with data from another, unlike uploading
where a complete set of files are read and decoded in one operation.
Opening a generated file follows the same sequence of operation as opening a config-
uration file with the following exception:
Change the [Files of type:] drop down selector to either *.sc1 or *.b??.
Once a previously generated file has been opened and decoded the user has the potential to subsequently save
this as a configuration file and run the generation process. This is not the advised mode of operation as the data
set used is incomplete and in terms of the number of Base Radios in the configuration, may not be representative
of the original configuration. The normal mode of operation should always be to use the configuration file.
Save Command (File Menu)

Use this command to save the active document to its current name and directory. When you
save a document for the first time, the BTS Service Software displays the Save As dialog box
so you can name your document. If you want to change the name and directory of an existing
document before you save it, choose the "File Save As Dialog Box".
Shortcuts
Toolbar:
Keys: CTRL+S
Accessed via the file menu or the tool bar, this command allows the current personality to be saved to an
existing or new file. If the file has no previously saved version then the File -> Save As dialog box is displayed.
Save As Command (File Menu)

Use this command to save and name the active document. The BTS Service Software displays
the Save As dialog box so you can name your document.
To save a document with its existing name and directory, use the Save Command.
Accessed from the File pull down menu, or when using the File->Save command on a file
that has no existing disk version. The user is provided with the functionality to name or
rename the file and choose the storage drive and location.
The procedure for saving a file is as follows:
Select the required disk from the [Save in:] drop down selector.
Browse the directory structure to find the desired storage location.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-3

File Import Command (File Menu) Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Enter the name of the file you need to save into the File Name box. If overwriting an existing file or using an old
file name as a basis for the new one, select the file required file from the list box. Press OK to commence saving.
If the file exists a warning is displayed requesting the user to confirm the overwrite operation before proceeding.
The file is now saved to disk.
File Import Command (File Menu)

BTS files can be accessed via other applications, such as the Software Download Manager via the
Import/Export menus. For example the Software Download Manager can upload configuration files,
which can then be Imported into the Service Software. The BTS Service Software edits and then exports
the modified files back to the SWDLM, which downloads them to the site again.
Use the standard windows dialog box to select the files you want to import.
The following fields allow you to specify which files to import:
File Name
Type or select the filename you want to open. This box lists files with the extension
you select in the List Files of Type box.
List Files of Type
Select the type of file you want to open. This should be .sc1 for a Root Config File
Look In
Choose this drop-down list to choose a path where the files are located.
Shortcuts
Keys: CTRL+I
File Export Command (File Menu)

BTS files can be accessed via other applications, for example, the Software Download Manager via the
Import/Export menus. E.g. the Software Download Manager can upload configuration files, which
can then be imported into the Service Software. The BTS Service Software edits and then Exports the
modified files back to the SWDLM, which downloads them to the site again.
Once an Export operation has been performed, the send raw config files command (available as
part of ‘Download Configuration’) is useful when the exact same BTS configuration is required
on more than one BTS (that is, not modified by the Service Software itself). Typically this would
be used to download a set of converted/modified configuration files generated by the Software
Download Manager to an existing local BTS in order to verify operation.
The following options allow you to specify the name and location of the file set you are about to export:
File Name
Type a new filename to save a Config Fileset with a different name. The BTS Service
Software adds the extensions automatically.
Look In
Choose this drop-down list to choose a path where the files are located.
2-4 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Print Command (File Menu)
Shortcuts
Keys: CTRL+E
Print Command (File Menu)

Use this command to print a document. This command presents a Print dialog box, where you may specify the
range of pages you want to print, the number of copies, the destination printer, and other printer setup options.
Shortcuts
Toolbar:
Keys: CTRL+P
Accessed from the menu and tool bar this feature allows the user to print all the data contained within the
currently loaded personality. Also provided is facility to print a single page or range of pages.
After selecting the print function the user is presented with a dialog box. The printer selection should
be checked to ensure that it is correct if not, it needs a setup. The next step is to select the page range
to be printed. 'All' is highlighted by default and this results in the entire personality being printed. The
selection of the 'Pages' button prints the inclusive range of pages indicated in the 'From' and 'To' boxes.
The default values in these boxes are the first and last page of the personality. Printing a single page
can be achieved by specifying the same first and last page number in the 'From' and 'To' boxes. Should
the user desire the pages to be printed in reverse order this is achieved by setting the 'From' number
higher than the 'To' number. The last option before commencing is to select the required number of
copies to be printed. Once this is done clicking the OK button commences printing.
Print Preview Command (File Menu)

Use this command to display the active document, as it would appear when printed. When you choose this
command, the main window is replaced with a print preview window in which one or two pages are displayed
in their printed format. The print preview toolbar offers you options to view either one or two pages at a time;
move back and forth through the document; zoom in and out of pages; and initiate a print job.
Provides a preview of the data you want to print. Standard Windows toolbar buttons can be used
to navigate through the pages and zoom in and out where necessary.
Print preview is only available if a printer has been installed and configured on the host machine.
Shortcuts
Toolbar:
Print Setup Command (File Menu)

Use this command to select a printer and a printer connection. This command presents a Print
Setup dialog, where you specify the printer and its connection.
Displays a dialog box that allows the printer options and settings to be modified. If no printer is
installed then refer to the Windows user manual for more information.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-5

1,2,3,4 Command (File Menu) Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
1,2,3,4 Command (File Menu)

Use the numbers and filenames listed at the bottom of the File menu to open the last four documents
you closed. Choose the number that corresponds with the document you want to open.
The Most Recently Used (MRU) files list provides the user with a short cut to open one of the four
last most recently used files. Accessing a file from the MRU list is achieved via the main File
menu. The desired file opens by a left click of the mouse button or keyboard equivalent. If the BTS
Service Software has not as yet been used to open any files then this area shows Recent File grayed
out. If the user has opened a generated file the name is not added into the list.
Exit Command (File Menu)

Use this command to end your BTS Service Software session. You can also use the Close command on the
Application Control menu. The BTS Service Software prompts you to save documents with unsaved changes.
The BTS Service Software suggests that you save changes to your document before you exit the
application. If you close a document without saving, you lose all changes made since the last time
you saved it. Before closing an untitled document, the BTS Service Software displays the Save
As dialog box and suggests that you name and save the document.
Shortcuts
Mouse: Click the application's Control menu button.
Keys: ALT+F4
View Menu
The View Menu contains the following sub-menus:
"Toolbar (View Menu)"
"Status Bar Command (View Menu)"
Toolbar (View Menu)

Use this command to display and hide the Toolbar, which includes buttons for some of the
most common commands in the BTS Service Software, such as File Open. A check mark
appears next to the menu item when the Toolbar is displayed.
Status Bar Command (View Menu)

Use this command to display and hide the Status Bar, which describes the action to be executed
by the selected menu item or depressed toolbar button, and keyboard latch state. A check mark
appears next to the menu item when the Status Bar is displayed.
2-6 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Personality Menu
Personality Menu
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The Personality Menu contains the following sub-menus:

"Modify Command (Personality Menu)"
"Print to File (Personality Menu)"
Modify Command (Personality Menu)

This main menu and tool bar item displays the top-level data entry window. All the parameters
required to configure a site are available through this window.
Shortcuts
Toolbar:
Keys: CTRL+M
Print to File (Personality Menu)

Accessed from the Personality menu. This feature allows the user to print all the data currently contained in
the personality into an ASCII file, which can be read with any standard text editor (for example Notepad).
The procedure for printing in a text file is as follows:
• Select the required disk from the [Save in:] drop down selector.
• Browse the directory structure to find the desired storage location.
• Enter the name of the file you want to save into the ‘File name:’ box. If overwriting an
existing file or using an old file name as a basis for the new one, select the file required file
from the list box. Press OK to commence saving. If the file exists a warning is displayed
requesting the user to confirm the overwrite operation before proceeding.
• The file is now saved to disk.
Site Configuration
The Site Configuration screen is the top-level personality configuration screen and provides access to the
various parts of the site configuration. A site title field is provided for the user to give a more meaningful
description of the site than can be contained in the file name. A version number field allows the user
to version control his configuration data files if required. The description and version are displayed by
the BTS Service Software in the "File Open Dialog Box" screen when a file is selected. This allows the
user to identify the required file without opening the file and examining the contents in detail. The Site
Configuration screen allows access to the "Site Controller" specific parameter screens, "Serving Cell"
parameter screens, Adjacent Site parameter screens and "Base Radio" parameter screens. Buttons are
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-7

Site Configuration Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
provided to enable Adjacent Channels and Base Radios to be added to and deleted from the site configuration.
The Add button always adds an instance (Adjacent Channel or Base Radio) to the end of the current
list, where as the Delete deletes the instance currently shown in the pull down list box.
The parameters placed directly on this screen have the following characteristics:
Standby TSC Installed
Range: No, Yes
Default: No
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Controller
Comments: When checked, this field indicates that a standby TSC has been installed. When a
standby TSC is installed, status messaging to the ZM indicates the status of the
standby. If the standby is not present and this flag is set then the ZM sees a faulty
standby unit.
XHUB Installed (only for MTS 4, R5.2 or later)

Range: No, Yes
Default: No
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Comments: When checked, this field indicates that XHUB has been installed. When XHUB is
installed, status messaging to the ZM indicates the status of XHUB. If the XHUB is
not present and this flag is set then the ZM sees a faulty XHUB unit.
This check box is not active if the MTS2/MTS1 option has been chosen while logging.
Site Link - Interface Type (available since R6.2)
Range: E1 Single (1)
X21 (2)
Ethernet (3)
E1 Dual (4)
Default: E1 Single (1)
Step size: 1
2-8 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Configuration
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Com- The parameter defines interface type for site link. If the Site Link Interface Type parameter
ments: is set to Ethernet Site Link then some options specific to E1 and X21 links which are
accessible via Site Router and Site Link tabs shall be blocked. The blocked options are not
relevant for Ethernet site link, and can be ignored. Similarly, if the Site Link Interface Type
parameter is set to either "X.21" or "E1", all options in the Ethernet Site Link tab become
non-relevant and shall be blocked.
For MTS1 only E1 and Ethernet links are supported. X21 is not supported for MTS 1.
Primary Satellite (available since R6.2)
Range: on(1)
off(2)
Default: off(2)
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Comments: The parameter sets satellite link option for primary WAN interface.
Secondary Satellite (available since R6.2)

Range: on(1)
off(2)
Default: off(2)
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Comments: The parameter sets satellite link option for secondary WAN interface.
This parameter cannot be set if E1 Single, X21 or Ethernet - Single Site

Link Interface Type was selected.
Standby BR Installed
Range: No, Yes
Default: No
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-9

Site Configuration Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Enabled state: Enabled when two or more BRs are present and eMTS Installed is not selected,
otherwise disabled.
Comments: Selects the last BR as a standby BR, which takes over from any failed BR. In this
mode a BR is held in the Locked-Enabled-Idle state until required.
This check box is not active if the MTS1 has been chosen while logging.
When a BR is deleted and ‘Standby BR Installed’ is enabled the ‘Standby BR Installed’ status
is cleared. The BR defined for standby operation (last BR) is conceptually deleted.
For eTETRA configuration the only possible value for this parameter is 'No'.
If the eMTS installed checkbox is selected then the value of this parameter is set to 'No'.
eMTS Installed (only for MTS 4, R6.2 or later)
The eMTS Installed checkbox controls additional Extended Band parameters available on the Carrier
tab of the Serving Cell window and on the RF Parameters tab in the Base Radio window. If the eMTS
Installed checkbox is selected Extended Frequency Band and Extended TX Base Frequency Band
are available to be set on the Carrier tab in the Serving Cell window and the Extended Band Qualifier
checkbox can be selected or cleared on the RF Parameters tab in the Base Radio window.
When eMTS (mixed band MTS - supporting eTETRA) works with ZC that does not
support eTETRA then Dual Band Roaming Supported parameter should be enabled
(set to Yes) on this eMTS and on all adjacent sites.
This check box is not active if the MTS1 has been chosen while logging.
Configuration for 10 BRs can be created only if eMTS Installed check box has been selected.
Standby BR Extra Capacity
Range: No, Yes
Default: No
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
2-10 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Serving Cell
Enabled state: Enabled if ‘Standby BR Installed’ is “Yes”, otherwise disabled.

Comments: This option is only available when the ‘Standby BR Installed’ is selected. When
this option is checked, this allows the BR to be unlocked to provide extra capacity.
If this BR is not Unlocked then the BR acts as a Standby BR. Note, if the BR with
MCCH fails and there are no other Control Channel capable BR, ‘Extra Capacity’ is
removed to replace the failed BR.
For eTETRA configuration the only possible value for this parameter is 'No'.
If the eMTS installed checkbox is selected then value of this parameter is set to 'No'.
When a BR is deleted and ‘Standby BR Extra Capacity’ is enabled ‘Standby BR Extra Capacity’
is cleared. The BR defined for Extra Capacity (last BR) is conceptually deleted.
Serving Cell
The Serving Cell screens contain parameters, which are common to all the Base Radios or to
both the Site Controller and the Base Radios within the BTS. The parameters are divided into ten
categories, Mobile Station system Access , Traffic Channel Parameters, common System , Reselection
Parameters, Base Radio Carrier Parameters, general Security Parameters, security KEK Data, security
SCK Data, Packet Data Parameters, and RF Immunity Parameters.
Serving Cell - Access Parameters

The Access Parameters screen contains parameters, which control the ability of a Mobile Station
(MS) to gain access to the system. The Base Radio uses these parameters but they are common
to all Base Radios within the Base Transceiver Station (BTS).
The parameters contained on this screen have the following characteristics:
Max MS Tx Power (Maximum Mobile Station Transmit Power)
Range: 15 to 45
Default: 35
Step size: 5
Units: dBm
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The maximum Mobile Station (MS) transmit power is broadcast by the system to the
MS and informs the MS of the maximum power that is allowed to be transmitted at
the site. It is used to influence the cell selection/reselection process. This parameter
should be considered in a system context as it affects the behavior of the MS.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-11

Serving Cell - Access Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Changes to this parameter that are made at the remote site using this Service
Software are overwritten by values set in the network management terminal when
connection to the master site is established. The parameter change received from
the network management terminal has immediate effect.
Min Rx Acc. Level (Minimum Receiver Access Level)
Range: -125 to -50
Default: -110
Step size: 5
Units: dBm
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The minimum receive access level is broadcast by the system to the Mobile Station
(MS) and informs the MS of the minimum received signal level required at the site.
It is used to influence the cell selection/reselection process. This parameter should
be considered in a system context as it affects the behavior of the MS.
Access Parameter
Range: -53 to -23
Default: -39
Step size: 2
Units: dBm
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The access parameter is broadcast by the system to the Mobile Station (MS) and
is used by the MS to calculate the power transmitted. It is used to influence the
cell selection/reselection process. This parameter should be considered in a system
context as it affects the behavior of the MS.
2-12 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Serving Cell - Access Parameters
Minimum Priority
Range: 0 to 7
Default: 0
Step size: 1
Units: 0 = all access allowed.
1 to 7 = Minimum random access priority.
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The minimum priority is broadcast by the system and is used by the Mobile Station
(MS) to determine if a message may be sent to the system. Messages of lower
priority than the value currently being broadcast by the system may not be sent. This
parameter should be considered in a system context as it affects the behavior of
the MS.
Random Access Timing

Range: 0 to 15
Default: 8
Step size: 1
Units: 0 = Always randomize.
15 = Immediate access.
1 to 14 = TDMA frames.
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: Also referred to as the IMM field in the TETRA access code. IMM is broadcast by the
system and is used by the Mobile Station (MS) when attempting a random access.
If the MS is required to attempt a random access but is unable to do so within the
specified number of frames then it must subsequently randomize before the attempt
is made. This parameter should be considered in a system context as it affects the
behavior of the MS. It does not apply to packet data.
Radio Downlink Timeout

Range: 0 to 2160
Default: 432
Step size: 144
Units: Timeslots, 0 = timeout disabled.
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The radio downlink timeout is broadcast by the system to the Mobile Station (MS) and
is used by the MS to determine when the downlink is considered to have failed. This
parameter should be considered in a system context as it affects the behavior of the MS.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-13

Serving Cell - Access Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Random Acc. Response Timer (Random Access Response Timer)

Range: 1 to 15
Default: 5
Step size: 1
Units: downlink opportunities
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: Also referred to as the WT field in the TETRA access code. WT is broadcast by the
system and is used by the Mobile Station (MS) when attempting a random access. If
a random access attempt was unsuccessful then the MS must wait for WT downlink
opportunities before re-trying. This parameter should be considered in a system
context as it affects the behavior of the MS. It does not apply to packet data.
Random Acc. Transmissions (Random Access Transmissions)

Range: 0 to 15
Default: 5
Step size: 1
Units: Number of random access transmissions allowed.
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: Also referred to as the NU field in the TETRA access code. NU is broadcast by the
system and is used by the Mobile Station (MS) when attempting a random access. It is
used as the maximum number of random access transmissions allowed before the MS
deems that random access has failed. This parameter should be considered in a system
context as it affects the behavior of the MS. It does not apply to packet data.
Frame Length Factor

Range: 1, 4
Default: 1
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The frame length factor is broadcast by the system to the Mobile Station (MS) and
is used by the MS as a multiplier for the Random Access Frame. This parameter
should be considered in a system context as it affects the behavior of the MS. It does
not apply to packet data.
Random Acc. Frame Length

Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, 32 (For Frame Length Factor = 1)
Default: 10
Step size: N/A
2-14 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Serving Cell - Traffic Channel Parameters
Units: subslots
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The random access frame length is broadcast by the system to the Mobile Station (MS)
and is used by the MS to determine the number of subslots in which to randomize
whilst attempting a random access. Values are multiplied by the Frame Length Factor
parameter. This parameter should be considered in a system context as it affects the
behavior of the MS. It does not apply to packet data.
Serving Cell - Traffic Channel Parameters

The Traffic window contains parameters related to the characteristics of voice traffic on the system. Limits are
set to determine the point at which the delay to voice packets is no longer considered to be acceptable.
Traffic Inactivity Delay
Range: 0 to 144
Default: 50
Step size: 1
Units: frames with no traffic
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This parameter determines how many consecutive frames should be received without
decodeable uplink traffic packets from the transmitting Mobile Station (MS) on a traffic
channel before the channel is considered to be inactive.
Optimal Synch(roniz)ed Traffic Routing Delay (Not used in R5.0 and higher)
Range: 0 to 144
Default: 5
Step size: 1
Units: slot periods
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: . This parameter controls the audio delay algorithm used by the Base Radio (BR) to
ensure optimum audio delays from other synchronized BRs
Average Unsynch(roniz)ed Traffic Routing Delay (Not used in R5.0 and higher)
Range: 0 to 144
Default: 4
Step size: 1
Units: slot periods
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This parameter controls the audio delay algorithm used by the Base Radio (BR) to
ensure optimum audio delays from unsynchronized transcoders.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-15

Serving Cell - Traffic Channel Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Worst Unsynch(roniz)ed Traffic Routing Delay (Not used in R5.0 and higher)
Range: 0 to 144
Default: 8
Step size: 1
Units: slot periods
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This parameter controls the audio delay algorithm used by the Base Radio (BR) to
ensure optimum audio delays from unsynchronized transcoders.
Late Packets For Synch(roniz)ed Delay Adj(ustmen)t
Not available since D6.1

Range: 1 to 255
Default: 5
Step size: 1
Units: late traffic packets
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This parameter controls how many consecutive traffic packets must be received late
before the Base Radio (BR) increases the traffic routing delay from synchronized
sources.
Late Packets For Unsynch(roniz)ed Delay Adj(ustmen)t

Range: 1 to 255
Default: 5
Step size: 1
Units: late traffic packets
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This parameter controls how many consecutive traffic packets must be received late
before the Base Radio (BR) increases the traffic routing delay from an unsynchronized
source.
2-16 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Serving Cell - Traffic Channel Parameters
Path Delay Exceeded
In the D7.0 release this parameter can not be configured and adopts default value.
Range: 1 to 255
Default: 5
Step size: 1
Units: Uplink slots
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This parameter determines how many consecutive uplink traffic slots with excessive
path delay must be received before the Base Radio (BR) sends a message to the Site
Controller (SC).
Path Delay Threshold
Table below applies to releases prior to D7.0.

Range: 0 to 70
Default: 50
Step size: 1
Units: 10th symbol times (5.56 µs)
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This parameter controls the roundtrip path delay required before a transmission is
considered to be excessively delayed. Each unit corresponds to a terminal to site
distance of 0.830 km. The maximum terminal to site distance for a setting of 70 is
58.1 km.
Table below applies to D7.0 release.

Range: 0 to 58.1 for EBTS and MBTS
0 to 83.0 for MTS
Default: 41.5
Step size: 0.83
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-17

Serving Cell - Traffic Channel Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Units: km
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This parameter controls the roundtrip path delay required before a transmission is
considered to be excessively delayed. The path delay is set in step sizes site distance
of 0.83 km corresponding to 1/10th of symbol period or 5.56 µs. The maximum
terminal to site distance for EBTS & MBTS is 58.1 km and 83 km for MTS. Setting
the Path Delay Threshold higher than 58.1 km is associated with a warning and shall
only be done for dedicated Air to Ground Stations with the appropriate setting of
Subscriber Class corresponding to Air to Ground-compliant subscribers.
Audio Jitter Buffer for Non-Vocoded Call (Not used in R3.8)
Range: 0 to 100
Default: 30
Step size: 1
Units: ms
Scope: Base Radio
Comments: This parameter allows configuration of the non-vocoded audio jitter buffer size of the
Base Radio Controller.
connection to the master site is established.
Audio Jitter Buffer for Vocoded Call (Not used in R3.8)
Range: 0 to 100
Default: 30
Step size: 1
Units: ms
Scope: Base Radio
Comments: This parameter allows configuration of the vocoded audio jitter buffer size of the Base
Radio Controller.
2-18 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Serving Cell - System Information
connection to the master site is established.
Serving Cell - System Information

The System window contains parameters relating to the identification of the system and of cells
within the system. The parameters are all related to the way a site is differentiated from other sites
by a Mobile Station (MS) when decoding control channel telegrams.
Color Code
Range: 0 to 63
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The color code is broadcast by the system to inform the MS of the type of scrambling
employed by the Remote Site (BTS). A value of zero should only be used when all
cells in the system use the same color code i.e. 0. Zero is predefined scrambling. It is
recommended that a value different from zero be used.
Changes to this parameter that are made at the remote site using this Service Software
are overwritten by values set in the network management terminal when connection
to the master site is established. The parameter change received from the network
management terminal only takes effect after a subsequent site reset.
Mobile Country Code
Range: 0 to 1023
Default: 0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: System wide
Comments: The country code for the TETRA system, assigned according to the country in which
the network is deployed. The number should be that defined in Annex D of CCITT
Recommendation X.121. Broadcast by the TETRA system to identify the country
code of the network.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-19

Serving Cell - System Information Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Mobile Network Code
Range: 0 to 16383
Default: 0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: System wide
Comments: The network code for the TETRA system, normally assigned by the National
Administration of the country in which the network is deployed. A unique value
should be assigned to each network within a country. Broadcast by the TETRA system
to uniquely identity the network.
Location Area
Range: 0 to 16383
Default: 0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: A location area can be a single site or a grouping of sites. This parameter provides
a label for this location area, which is broadcast by the Remote Site (BTS). In the
Dimetra system, each remote site in a system must have a unique location area value.
2-20 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Serving Cell - System Information
System Code
Range: 0 to 15
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: System wide
Comments: Broadcast by the TETRA system to identify which edition of the TETRA Standard the
network is currently adhering to.
Subscriber Class (Not used in R5.0 and R3.8)
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 65535
Step size: 1
Units: Bit Map
Scope: System wide
Comments: This is the TETRA subscriber class for the BTS. If this value is set to '0' no mobiles
can access this cell unless making emergency calls.
Local Time Offset (from UTC) (Available starting from R5.2)
Range: -50400 to 50400 (i.e. +/- 14 hours)
Default: 0
Step size: 900 (i.e. 15 minutes)
Units: Seconds
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-21

Alarm Filters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Comments: The Local time offset information element shall indicate the difference between
the local time and the network time.
This parameter is displayed in the GUI in the hours/minutes format (

/-)hh:mm. Sign character is appended only for negative values
Alarm Filters
The following sections describe alarms and their parameters.
Alarms
The BTS is able to monitor and record alarms generated due to fault conditions at the site. The alarms
are divided into six categories (Communications, Diagnostics, Environment, Processing, Equipment
and Quality of Service). The exact cause of the alarm is identified by an alarm code.
The Alarms Common screen contains parameters common to all alarm categories.
The Alarms screens contain parameters, which control filtering of alarms within the BTS. By
the filters, the number of alarm occurrences required to trigger reporting of an alarm can be
controlled. Separate screens are provided for each category of an alarm. An overall alarm
control screen is also provided for overall alarm control.
Alarms - Common
are divided into 6 categories (Communications, Diagnostics, Environment, Processing, Equipment and
Quality of Service). The exact cause of the alarm is identified by means of an alarm code.
The Alarms Common screen contains parameters common to all alarm categories. The parameters
contained on this screen have the following characteristics:
Severity Filter
Range: None, Indeterminate, Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.
Default: 'None'
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The Severity Filter for all site alarm codes.
None - No filtering is applied on the alarm traps (i.e., report all alarm traps).
Indeterminate - Allow indeterminate severity alarm traps and above.
Warning - Allow warning severity alarm traps and above.
Minor - Allow minor severity alarm traps and above.
Major - Allow major severity alarm traps and above.
Critical - Allow critical severity alarm traps only.
2-22 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Alarms - Communications
Alarms - Communications
are divided into six categories (Communications, Diagnostics, Environment, Processing, Equipment and
Quality of Service). The exact cause of the alarm is identified by means of an alarm code. The Alarms
Communications screen contains parameters related to the communications category of alarms. This would
typically include alarms related to the BTS Ethernet and X.21 communications routes.
Severity Filter Control
Range: Do Not Filter This Alarm, Filter This Alarm
Default: Do Not Filter This Alarm
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: Overall control for severity filtering for Communication Failure alarms.
Do not filter this alarm code (for example, report the alarm).
Filter this alarm code (for example, do not report the alarm).
Severity Filter Level

Range: Indeterminate, Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.
Default: Major
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The severity filter level for Communication Failure alarms.
None - No filtering is applied on the alarm traps (for example, report all alarm traps).

Critical - Allow critical severity alarm traps and above.
Threshold Type
Range: Simple Counter, Gauge (Not currently supported by BTS)
Default: Simple Counter
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The threshold type can either be a counter in which case a simple limit is used to
trigger the alarm. The gauge requires that a particular rate is exceeded before the
alarm is triggered.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-23

Alarms - Quality Of Service Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Threshold Count
Range: 1-65535
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The threshold count for Communication Failure alarms. If the Alarm Threshold Type
is Simple Counter, then this parameter is the number of times the alarm must occur
before a Communication Failure Alarm Trap is logged. If the Alarm Threshold Type
is Gauge, then this parameter is the number of times the alarm must occur within the
Threshold Time before an alarm Trap is logged.
Threshold Timer
Range: 0-65535
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The Threshold Time for Communication Failure alarms. If the Alarm Threshold Type
is Simple Counter, then this parameter is not used and always set to 0. If the Alarm
Threshold Type is Gauge, then this parameter is the time interval in which the alarm
must occur more than Threshold Count times before an alarm Trap is logged.
Alarms - Quality Of Service

and Quality Of Service). The exact cause of the alarm is identified by means of an alarm code. The
Alarms Quality Of Service (QOS) screen contains parameters related to the quality of service category
of alarms. This would typically include alarms related to the call set-up time and failure rate.
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: Overall control for severity filtering for QOS Failure alarms.
Filter this alarm code (for example., do not report the alarm).
2-24 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Alarms - Quality Of Service

Default: Major
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The severity filter level for QOS Failure alarms.
Minor - Allow minor severity alarm traps and above
Threshold Type
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
alarm is triggered.
Threshold Count
Range: 1-65535
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The threshold count for QOS Failure alarms. If the Alarm Threshold Type is Simple
Counter, then this parameter is the number of times the alarm must occur before a
QOS Failure Alarm Trap is logged. If the Alarm threshold Type is Gauge, then this
parameter is the number of times the alarm must occur within the Threshold Time
before an alarm Trap is logged.
Threshold Timer
Range: 1-65535
Default: 1
Step size: 1
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-25

Alarms - Processing Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The Threshold Time for QOS Failure alarms. If the Alarm Threshold Type is Simple
Counter, then this parameter is not used and always set to 0. If the Alarm Threshold
Type is Gauge, then this parameter is the time interval in which the alarm must occur
more than Threshold Count times before an alarm Trap is logged.
Alarms - Processing
Quality of Service). The exact cause of the alarm is identified with an alarm code. The Alarms Processing
screen contains parameters related to the processing category of alarms. This would typically include
alarms related to internal software detected faults such as flash card memory read/write failures.
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: Overall control for severity filtering for Processing Failure alarms.
Filter this alarm code (for example, do not report the alarm).

Default: Major
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The severity filter level for Processing Failure alarms.
None - No filtering is applied on the alarm traps (for example, report all alarm traps).
2-26 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Alarms - Equipment
Threshold Type
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
trigger the alarm. The gauge requires a particular rate is exceeded before the alarm is
triggered.
Threshold Count
Range: 1-65535
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The threshold count for Processing Failure alarms. If the Alarm Threshold Type is
Simple Counter, then this parameter is the number of times the alarm must occur before
a Processing Failure Alarm Trap is logged. If the Alarm threshold Type is Gauge, then
this parameter is the number of times the alarm must occur within the Threshold Time
Threshold Timer
Range: 1-65535
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The Threshold Time for Processing Failure alarms. If the Alarm Threshold Type is
Simple Counter, then this parameter is not used and always set to 0. If the Alarm
Alarms - Equipment
Quality of Service). The exact cause of the alarm is identified with an alarm code. The Alarms Equipment
screen contains parameters related to the equipment category of alarms. This would typically include
alarms related to hardware components of the BTS such as receivers and power amplifiers.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-27

Alarms - Equipment Chapter 2: Service Software Operation

Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: Overall control for severity filtering for Equipment Failure alarms.
Do not filter this alarm code (i.e., report the alarm).
Filter this alarm code (i.e., do not report the alarm).

Default: Major
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The severity filter level for Equipment Failure alarms.
Threshold Type
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
alarm is triggered.
Threshold Count
Range: 1-65535
Default: 1
Step size: 1
2-28 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Alarms - Environment
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The threshold count for Equipment Failure alarms. If the Alarm Threshold Type is
an Equipment Failure Alarm Trap is logged. If the Alarm threshold Type is Gauge,
then this parameter is the number of times the alarm must occur within the Threshold
Time before an alarm Trap is logged.
Threshold Timer
Range: 1-65535
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The Threshold Time for Equipment Failure alarms. If the Alarm Threshold Type is
Simple Counter, then this parameter is not used and always set to 0. If the Alarm
Alarms - Environment
The BTS is able to monitor and record alarms generated due to fault conditions at the site. The
alarms are divided into six categories (Communications, Diagnostics, Environment, Processing,
Equipment and Quality of Service). The exact cause of the alarm is identified with an alarm code.
The Alarms Environment screen contains parameters related to the environment category of alarms.
This category is available for the external alarm monitoring inputs provided by the BTS and would
typically be used for smoke alarms and mains power failure detection.
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: Overall control for severity filtering for Environment Failure alarms.

Default: Major
Step size: N/A
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-29

Alarms - Environment Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The severity filter level for Environment Failure alarms.
Threshold Type
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
alarm is triggered.
Threshold Count
Range: 1-65535
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The threshold count for Environment Failure alarms. If the Alarm Threshold Type is
an Environment Failure Alarm Trap is logged. If the Alarm threshold Type is Gauge,
then this parameter is the number of times the alarm must occur within the Threshold
Time before an alarm Trap is logged.
Threshold Timer
Range: 1-65535
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The Threshold Time for Environment Failure alarms. If the Alarm Threshold Type
is Simple Counter, then this parameter is not used and always set to 0. If the Alarm
2-30 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Alarms - Diagnostics
Alarms - Diagnostics
and Quality of Service). The exact cause of the alarm is identified with an alarm code. The Alarms
Diagnostics screen contains parameters related to the Diagnostics category of alarms. This would
typically include alarms used by Motorola engineers to assist system fault diagnosis.
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: Overall control for severity filtering for Diagnostics alarms.

Default: Major
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The severity filter level for Diagnostics alarms.
Threshold Type
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
alarm is triggered.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-31

EAS/IAC Contacts Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Threshold Count
Range: 1-65535
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The threshold count for Diagnostics alarms. If the Alarm Threshold Type is Simple
Counter, then this parameter is the number of times the alarm must occur before a
Diagnostics Alarm Trap is logged. If the Alarm threshold Type is Gauge, then this
parameter is the number of times the alarm must occur within the Threshold Time
Threshold Timer
Range: 1-65535
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The Threshold Time for Diagnostics alarms. If the Alarm Threshold Type is Simple
Counter, then this parameter is not used and always set to 0. If the Alarm Threshold
Type is Gauge, then this parameter is the time interval in which the alarm must occur
more than Threshold Count times before an alarm Trap is logged.
EAS/IAC Contacts
This screen is accessed from the Alarm Text button on the Serving Cell − System screen.
The screen consists of the following tabs:
• Input Contacts
• Output Contacts (not available for systems older than EBTS R5.2)
Input Contacts
This screen, accessed from the Alarm Text button on the Serving Cell – System screen, allows the user
to enter up to 30 characters of text associated with each input of the EAS or IAC.
On entry to the screen the list box is loaded with the current 48 input text strings for an EBTS, current 16 input
text strings for an MTS 4 and MTS 2, current 3 input text strings for an MTS 1(6 input text strings for Dual
MTS 1) or the current 8 input text strings for an MBTS, which can then be edited. The Input Modifier (not
used in R5.0 and R3.8) can be applied to determine whether the alarm condition shall be active on Open/Close.
To edit a text string use the following process:
• Select the number of the string to be changed from the Contact Number drop down selector.
Any text currently associated with this number is displayed in the associated text box, where
the user can edit it. The box is empty if no string currently exists, the user can then enter a one.
2-32 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Disclaimer Message
• On completion of the text entry, changing the focus to another control on the screen with
the mouse or pressing the ENTER key causes the main list is updated.
Output Contacts (Available only for EBTS mode, starting from R5.2)
This screen, accessed from the Alarm Text button on the Serving Cell – System screen, allows the user
to specify the functionality of each of the Environmental Alarm System (EAS) output relays.
Each output can be assigned one of the following functions:
— Output not used

— Manual control via the MMI
— Automatic activation on loss of Wide Trunking
Automatic activation based on severity of BTS state, with the following choices for the severity:
— Warning or higher
— Minor or higher
— Major or higher
— Critical
On entry to the screen the list box is loaded with the current setting for all 7 inputs for a BTS, which can then
be modified. The Assigned Functionality drop-down selector can be used to change contact functionality.
To modify contact functionality use the following process:
• Select the contact number from the Contact drop-down selector or from Output
Contacts (Overview) list box. The Assigned Functionality selection changes
to currently associated with this contact.
• Select new functionality from Assigned Functionality drop-down selector. The
Output Contacts (Overview) list is updated automatically.
Disclaimer Message
The Disclaimer Message (available in releases R6.2 and above) is displayed by clicking from the
Disclaimer Message button on the Serving Cell window's System tab. The string message provided in
this dialog is displayed on the BTS device prompt upon an attempt to log in. The Disclaimer Message
is stored in and read from the configuration file. There is no Disclaimer Message default.
This parameter is supported on all BTSs (EBTS, MBTS, and MTS) since release R6.2 SSR R3.
Serving Cell - Reselection Parameters

The Reselection window contains parameters, which determine the thresholds and hysteresis levels
used by the Mobile Station (MS) when performing channel reselection.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-33

Serving Cell - Reselection Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Slow Reselect Threshold Above Fast

Range: 0 to 30
Default: 6
Step size: 2
Units: dB
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The Slow Reselect Threshold Above Fast is broadcast by the system to the Mobile
Station (MS) in relation to cell reselection. This parameter is used by the MS in
conjunction with the Slow Reselect Hysteresis to determine if the serving cell is
improvable by a neighbor cell.
Slow Reselect Threshold is the sum of Fast Reselect Threshold and Slow
Reselect Threshold Above Fast.
Fast Reselect Threshold
Range: 0 to 30
Default: 10
Step size: 2
Units: dB
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The Fast Reselect Threshold is broadcast by the system to the Mobile Station (MS)
in relation to cell reselection. This parameter is used by the MS in conjunction with
the Fast Reselect Hysteresis to determine if the serving cell is relinquish able by a
neighbor cell.
Slow Reselect Hysteresis

Range: 0 to 30
Default: 8
Step size: 2
Units: dB
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The Slow Reselect Hysteresis is broadcast by the system to the Mobile Station (MS)
the Slow Reselect Threshold Above Fast to determine if the serving cell is made
improvable by a neighbor cell.
Fast Reselect Hysteresis

Range: 0 to 30
Default: 6
Step size: 2
2-34 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Serving Cell - Carrier Parameters
Units: dB
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The Fast Reselect Hysteresis is broadcast by the system to the Mobile Station (MS)
the Fast Reselect Threshold to determine if the serving cell is made relinquish able
by a neighbor cell.
Serving Cell - Carrier Parameters

The Carrier window contains parameters, which determine the receive and transmit frequencies of
the Base Radios (BRs) in the BTS. The basic parameters are entered in this screen, determining the
base frequency, duplex spacing, etc. for the whole site. The exact frequencies are then determined
by the carrier number entered in the BR carrier parameter screen.
The equation used to determine the receive and transmit frequencies from the data entered is:-
BR Transmit Freq. = Base Transmit Freq.* + (Carrier Number x 25 kHz) + Carrier Offset
* for:
– Normal Frequency Band
or
– Extended Frequency Band
BR Receive Freq. = BR Transmit Freq. + or - Duplex Spacing
(Whether the Duplex Spacing is added or subtracted depends on the RX. Above TX. field)
Frequency Band
Range: 0 to 15
Default: 3
Step size: 1
Units: None
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: If this Band is used for the main Control Channel then this value is transmitted
(broadcast) by Base Radio on the control channel. This number is used to define the base
frequency for all frequency calculations the BTS Service Software automatically maps
these values to TX Base Frequencies as specified by the current ETSI Specification TS
100 392-15 V1.1.1. In other words, this value correlates to the value specified in the TX
Base Frequency field that is being set automatically. Great caution should be exercised
if you manually override this automatic mapping. The parameter should be consistent
with the overall system channel plan specified by system engineers.
Extended Band
Range: 0 to 15
Default: 4
Step size: 1
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-35

Serving Cell - Carrier Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Units: None
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: If this Band is used for the main Control Channel then this value is transmitted
(broadcast) by Base Radio on the control channel. This number is used to define the base
frequency for all frequency calculations the BTS Service Software automatically maps
these values to TX Base Frequencies as specified by the current ETSI Specification TS
100 392-15 V1.1.1. In other words, this value correlates to the value specified in the TX
Base Frequency field that is being set automatically. Great caution should be exercised
if you manually override this automatic mapping. The parameter should be consistent
with the overall system channel plan specified by system engineers.
TX (Transmit) Base Frequency (MHz)

Range: 100.00000 - 1000.00000
Default: 300.00000 - Normal Band
400.00000 - Extended Band
Step size: 6.25 kHz
Units: MHz
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This parameter is used internally within the BTS Service Software to determine
the transmit and receive frequencies of a Base Radio as in the equation at the top of
this page. This parameter is not directly used by the BTS. The parameter should be
consistent with the overall system channel plan specified by system engineers.
Duplex Spacing
Range: 0 to 7
Default: 0
Step size: 1
Units: None
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: Transmitted (broadcast) by Base Radio on the control channel. This number is used to
define the difference between the downlink and uplink frequencies. The BTS Service
Software automatically maps these values to Duplex Spacings (MHz) as specified by
the ETSI Specification TS 100 392-15 V1.1.1. In other words, this value correlates to
the value specified in the Duplex spacing (MHz) field that is being set automatically.
Great caution should be exercised if you manually override this automatic mapping.
The parameter should be consistent with the overall system channel plan specified by
system engineers.
Duplex Spacing (MHz)

Range: 0.0 - 100.0
Default: 10.0
Step size: 6.25 kHz
2-36 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Serving Cell - Carrier Parameters
Units: MHz
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This parameter is used internally within the BTS Service Software. It determines
the transmit and receive frequencies of a Base Radio as in the equation at the top of
this section. The BTS does not use this parameter directly. The parameter should be
consistent with the overall system channel plan specified by system engineers.
Carrier Offset
Range: 0, +6.25, -6.25, +12.5
Default: 0
Step size: N/A
Units: kHz
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: Transmitted (broadcast) by Base Radio on the control channel. This is added to the base
frequency to provide an offset in 6.25 kHz multiples. This parameter is also used within
the BTS Service Software to determine the transmit and receive frequencies of a Base
Radio as in the equation at the top of this page. The parameter should be consistent with
the overall system channel plan specified by engineers.
RX Above TX
Range: Yes, No
Default: No
Step size: N/A
Units: None
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: Transmitted (broadcast) by Base Radio on the control channel. This is used to control
whether to add or subtract the duplex spacing to arrive at the Base Radio receive
frequency. This parameter is referred to in TETRA specifications as the reverse
operation parameter, as such its value is determined by the following rules:
0 = subtract duplex spacing.
1 = add duplex spacing.
This parameter is also used within the BTS Service Software to determine the transmit
and receive frequencies of a Base Radio as in the equation at the top of this section.
The parameter should be consistent with the overall system channel plan specified by
system engineers.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-37

Serving Cell - Security Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Serving Cell - Security Parameters
This window is not visible since D6.1. The parameters are not configured since D6.1, but their
values are still imported/exported from/to configuration files and uploaded/downloaded from/to SC.
The Security window contains parameters, which are used to configure the Site Controller and all Base Radios
with the Air Interface Encryption parameters required to implement the security feature of the Dimetra system.
Air Interface Encryption Enabled
Range: Yes or No
Default: No
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: System
Comments: Indicates whether air interface encryption is enabled on the system.
Security Class 1 MS Supported
Range: Yes or No
Default: No
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: System
Comments: Allows MSs that do not support Air Interface Encryption to operate on the System.
management terminal takes effect immediately.
2-38 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Serving Cell - Security Parameters
Authentication Enabled (Not used in R3.8)

Range: Yes or No
Default: Yes
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: System
Comments: Indicates whether authentication is enabled on the system.
Security Class 3 Supported (Not used in R5.0 and R3.8)
Range: Yes or No
Default: No
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: System
Comments: Indicates whether Security Class 3 operation is enabled on the system. Must be always
set to 'No' (not used) in R5.0.
KSG Number
Range: 0 - 15
Default: 0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: System
Comments: Key Stream Generator Number identifies the algorithm used by the System for Air
Interface Encryption.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-39

Serving Cell - Security Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Encrypted Static Cipher Key (Not used in R5.0 and higher)
Range: 3x8 + 6 alphanumeric characters separated by hyphens
Default: 3x8 + 6 spaces separated by hyphens
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: System
Comments: Encrypted Static Cipher Key (SCK) used to encrypt Short Subscriber Identities (SSI)
control and traffic messages at the air interface.
SCK Number (Not used in R5.0 and higher)
Range: 0 - 31
Default: 0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: System
Comments: Key Number associated with the Static Cipher Key (SCK) used to encrypt Short
Subscriber Identities (SSI) control and traffic messages at the air interface.
SCK Version Number (Not used in R5.0 and higher)
Range: 0 - 65535
Default: 0
Step size: 1
2-40 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Serving Cell - Security Parameters
Units: None
Scope: System
Comments: Key Version Number associated with the Static Cipher Key (SCK) used to encrypt
Short Subscriber Identities (SSI) control and traffic messages at the air interface.
Encrypted SSI Address Range Start Address
Range: 1 - 15999999
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: None
Scope: System
Comments: The lowest Short Subscriber Identity (SSI) which may be used by Security Class 2
mobiles when the system is operating with Air Interface Encryption enabled.
Encrypted SSI Address Range End Address
Range: 1 - 15999999
Default: 15999999
Step size: 1
Units: None
Scope: System
Comments: The highest Short Subscriber Identity (SSI) which may be used by Security Class 2
mobiles when the system is operating with Air Interface Encryption enabled.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-41

Serving Cell - Packet Data Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Serving Cell - Packet Data Parameters
Since Dimetra 5.5 the Packet Data Tab is not visible, but the parameters are set up with default
values, unless otherwise specified via the Network Manager under PDCH Tuning
The Packet Data window contains parameters, which are used to configure the Site Controller and all
Base Radios with parameters related to the packet data feature of the Dimetra system.
Max Number of Slot Grant Transmissions (Not used in R5.5 and higher)
Range: 1 - 15
Default: 4
Step size: 1
Units: None
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The maximum number of times the Base Radio (BR) attempts to grant requested
resources to a Mobile Station (MS). When the BR grants slots to an MS, the MS may
not receive the slot grant and thus not use the resources. The BR then repeats the slot
grant. After this repeat, the BR will disregard the request, and the MS will be forced to
use random access.
Hold-off after Failed Slot Grant (Not used in R5.5 and higher)
Range: 1 - 68
Default: 4
Step size: 1
Units: None
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This parameter indicates how long the Base Radio (BR) waits for a Mobile Station
(MS) to start using granted resources after the Max Number Slot Grant Transmissions is
exceeded. Setting this value to 68 effectively prevents reuse of granted resources.
2-42 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Serving Cell - Packet Data Parameters
Channel Downlink Buffer Size (Not used in R5.5 and higher)

Range: 1 - 100
Default: 10
Step size: 1
Units: Slots
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This parameter indicates how much storage for advanced link segments the BR
allocates per PDCH.
Reserved Access Timeout (Not used in R5.5 and higher)
Range: 9 - 100
Default: 18
Step size: 1
Units: None
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: Also referred to as the T.206 TETRA timer. This value indicates how long the Base
Radio (BR) expects a Mobile Station (MS) to wait for granted resources before
reverting to random access.
Random Access Timing (IMM) for PDCH (Not used in R5.5 and higher)
Range: 0 - 15 (0 = Always randomize; 15 = Immediate access; 1 to 14 = TDMA frames)
Default: 8
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: Also referred to as the IMM field in the TETRA access code. IMM is broadcast by the
system and is used by the Mobile Station (MS) when attempting a random access. If the
MS is required to attempt a random access but is unable to do so within the specified
number of frames then it must subsequently randomize before the attempt is made.
This parameter should be considered in a system context as it affects the behavior
of the MS. It only applies to packet data.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-43

Serving Cell - Packet Data Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Random Access Response Timer (WT) for PDCH (Not used in R5.5 and higher)
Range: 1 - 15
Default: 5
Step size: 1
Units: downlink opportunities
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: Also referred to as the WT field in the TETRA access code. This parameter controls
the time the mobile station (MS) should wait to get a random access response from the
base station before retrying. This parameter should be considered in a system context
as it can modify the system behavior for MS units.
Random Access Transmissions (NU) for PDCH (Not used in R5.5 and higher)
Range: 0 - 15
Default: 5
Step size: 1
Units: Number of random access transmissions allowed
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: Also referred to as the NU field in the TETRA access code. This parameter sets the
maximum number of random access transmissions allowed before the mobile station
(MS) deems that random access has failed. This parameter should be considered in a
system context as it can modify the system behavior for MS units.
Frame Length Factor for PDCH (Not used in R5.5 and higher)
Range: 1 or 4
Default: 1
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This is a multiplier for the Random Access Frame Length and is transmitted to the
mobile station (MS) on the control channel. This parameter should be considered in a
system context as it can modify the system behavior for MS units.
Random Access Frame Length for PDCH (Not used in R5.5 and higher)
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, 32 (For Frame Length Factor for PDCH = 1)
Default: 6
Step size: N/A
2-44 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Serving Cell - RF Immunity Parameters
Units: subslots
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: Transmitted to the mobile station (MS) on the control channel, this parameter controls
the size of the random access frame length. Values are multiplied by the Frame Length
Factor parameter described above. This parameter should be considered in a system
context as it can modify the system behavior for MS units.
Serving Cell - RF Immunity Parameters

The RF Immunity window contains parameters, which are used to configure the Site Controller and all Base
Radios with parameters related to the Control Channel Immunity feature of the Dimetra system.
Automatic Interference Handler (Enable/Disable) (Not used in R5.0 and R3.8)
Range: Yes or No
Default: No
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This parameter enables automatic handling of interference conditions.
Received Signal Level Threshold (Not used in R5.0 and R3.8)

Range: -128 - 0
Default: -50
Step size: 1
Units: dBm
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The BTS Interference Detector checks data from signals with received signal strength
equal to or above this threshold value for validity. Signals with received signal strength
below this threshold are not checked for validity and therefore do not cause the BTS
to signal an interference condition. A value of zero includes all signals, including
background noise, and is not advisable.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-45

Serving Cell - RF Immunity Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Condition Alert Ratio (Not used in R5.0 and R3.8)

Range: 1 - 1000
Default: 3
Step size: 1
Units: n/a
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: Defines the ratio of valid to invalid received signal data that causes the BTS to signal
an interference condition. A value of 1 corresponds to 1:1 (50% of received data
must be valid). A value of 9 corresponds to 9 valid: 1 invalid (90% of received data
must be valid). An empty received frame counts as valid data, so a time element is
inherent in this value. A higher value causes the BTS to quickly show interference
alerts. A value of zero can be safely used to disable the interference detector at the
BTS − no interference alerts are shown.
Condition Alert Hysteresis (Not used in R5.0 and R3.8)
Range: 1 − 100000
Default: 15000
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: Defines the delay between first detecting interference (at the level defined by
the Interference Detector: Received Signal Threshold and Interference Detector:
Condition Alert Ratio) and the BTS showing an interference condition on the relevant
carrier. The same delay is also applied to clearing the interference condition. The
actual delay before showing an alert is a product of the actual interference ratio above
the specified Condition Alert Ratio and time. The actual delay for clearing an alert is a
product of the actual interference ratio below the specified Condition Alert Ration
and time.
Receive Path Threshold (only used for MTS)

Range: 5 dB — 100 dB
Default: 5 dB
Step size: 1
Units: dB
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This value is compared with the current RSSI value and used in an algorithm detecting
the receive path failure.
2-46 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Serving Cell - RF Immunity Parameters
BNCH (Broadcast Network Control Channel) Change Interval (Non Standard releases since R5.1)
Range: 0 - 10
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: 4.08 seconds
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The contents of BNCH at the cell can be varied over time so that subscribers can build
up a ranking list of available 'internal' or local MCCH replications for use in case the
MCCH in use should become unavailable. When multiple MCCH mode is enabled, this
value defines the time between changes of BCCH, in units of 4.08 s. A value of 0
disables variation of MCCH, the regular MCCH is always advertised, that is, the same
channel advertised by neighbor cells in the roaming information.
This parameter is appropriate only to customers operating a TETRA non-

standard variant using Motorola subscribers.
Enable All Channels Scrambler (Non Standard releases since R5.1)
Range: Yes or No
Default: No
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The All Channels Scrambler is a Motorola Proprietary scrambling algorithm that
requires special Motorola subscriber units to support the feature.
This is a TETRA non-standard mode of operation.

Scrambler Seed Configuration (Non Standard releases since R5.1)
Range: 54 bytes
Default: 54 x 0x00
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: Also referred to as Seed Configuration for All Channels Scrambler. The All Channels
Scrambler is a Motorola Proprietary scrambling algorithm that requires special
Motorola subscriber units to support the feature.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-47

Serving Cell - KEK Data Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
This is a TETRA non-standard mode of operation.
Serving Cell - KEK Data Parameters
Intra-zone Key Encryption Key (KEKz) Update 1 (Not used in R3.8)
Range: 53 Bytes
Default: N/A
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: BTS
Comments: Intra-zone Key Encryption Key Update 1 used to encrypt key material sent to the site.
Intra-zone Key Encryption Key (KEKz) Update 2 (Not used in R3.8)

Range: 53 Bytes
Default: N/A
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: BTS
Comments: Intra-zone Key Encryption Key Update 2 used to encrypt key material sent to the site.
Intra-zone Key Encryption Key (KEKz) Activation (Not used in R3.8)

Range: 28 Bytes
Default: N/A
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Zone Wide
Comments: Identifies the active Intra-zone Key Encryption Key for encrypting key material sent
to the site.
2-48 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Serving Cell - SCK Data Parameters
Default access level for KEK Data Parameters is 3. Further, KEK Data Parameters are then only
enabled when Air Interface Encryption Enabled on the Security tab is checked.
Serving Cell - SCK Data Parameters
Static Cipher Key (SCK) Update 1(Not used in R3.8)
Range: 47 Bytes
Default: N/A
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: BTS
Comments: Static Cipher Key Update 1 carries an SCK (sealed with KEKz) that is used in Class 2
air interface encryption.
Static Cipher Key (SCK) Update 2 (Not used in R3.8)

Range: 47 Bytes
Default: N/A
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: BTS
Comments: Static Cipher Key Update 2 carries an SCK (sealed with KEKz) that is used in Class 2
air interface encryption.
Static Cipher Key (SCK) Activation (Not used in R3.8)

Range: 28 Bytes
Default: N/A
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: System Wide
Comments: Static Cipher Key Activation provides the identity (SCKN and SCK-VN) of the active
SCK used in Class 2 air interface encryption.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-49

Site Controller Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Default access level for SCK Data Parameters is 3. Further, SCK Data Parameters are then only
enabled when “Air Interface Encryption Enabled” on the Security tab is also checked.
Site Controller
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The Site Controller configuration window contain parameters specific to the Site Controller.
These parameters are divided in the following categories:
• The General screen contains general Site Controller parameters.
• The Site Reference screen contains parameters related to external references.
• The Network Time Protocol (NTP) screen contains parameters specific to the
operation of Network Time Protocol service.
• The Addresses and Address Ranges screens contain system address param-
eters such as valid radio identity ranges.
• The Base Radio Controller screen contains parameters related to the interface between the
Site Controller and the BRC. The BRC is the control unit within the Base Radio.
• The Master Site screen contains parameters related to the interface be-
tween the BTS and the Master Site.
• The Calls screen contains call processing specific parameters such as call timers.
• The SDTS and Packet Data screens contain parameters related to short
data and packet data features respectively.
• The Voice screen contains parameters for controlling voice transportation in the system.
• The Network Management screen contains parameters specific to the op-
eration of network management.
• The Site Router screen contains parameters for controlling the low-level
transport protocols used on the site link.
• The Site Link screen contains address configuration data.
• The Ethernet Site Link screen contains parameters specific for the Eth-
ernet Site Link configuration.
2-50 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - General Parameters
Site Controller - General Parameters

The General screen contains general Site Controller parameters.
BTS Site ID
Range: • R3.8: 1 to 64
• R5.0: 1 to 120
• Since R5.1: 1 to 100
• When Local Gateway feature is enabled: 1 to 95
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The assigned identity of the Remote Site (BTS) used in communications with the
Master Site (Zone Controller). A unique value is required for each BTS in a zone.
BTS Zone ID
Range: • R3.8: 1 to 16
• R5.0: 1 to 128
• since R5.1: 1 to 256
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The Zone ID of this site.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-51

Site Controller - General Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Internal Codeplug Debug

Range: On (control selected) or Off
Default: Off
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Comments: Flag indicating whether or not the Site Controller internal database is displayed after
being loaded. This field is provided for diagnostic purposes only and should not be
selected during normal operation.
GPS RAIM Enable (Starting from R5.2 moved to the Site Reference tab)
Range: Enabled (control selected) or Disabled
Default: Enabled
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Comments: Specifies whether or not to enable the Time RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring) in the GPS (Global Positioning System). This feature is provided to handle
a specific satellite, which is known to provide a low quality signal. The default value
should be used to provide optimal system performance.
GPS Signal Lost Timer (Starting from R5.2 moved to the Site Reference tab)
Range: Infinite, 1 hr, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, 16 hours, 20 hours,
24 hours, 2 days, 4 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, 1 month, 2 months, 4 months,1 year.
Default: 4 hours
Step size: See range
Units: Hours
Comments: Specifies the time that the Site Controller will continue to run after the GPS receiver
has lost input signal. The value depends on the stability of the internal oscillator.
Note that Infinite value equals 65 years.
Setting this value greater than the default may mean that the site is unable
to maintain synchronization and can result in call failures.
2-52 6802700U57-W October 2010

LST Enable
Default: Enabled
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Comments: Enabling/disabling this control shall affect the ability of the site controller to enter into
the Local Site Trunking (LST) mode of operation. This mode of operation may occur
if the link to the Zone Controller (ZC) is lost or if the Zone Manager (ZM) makes a
request. This mode provides a stand-alone mode of operation from the site controller.
TSC Temperature Threshold (Not used in R5.0 and R3.8)

Range: 20 - 100
Default: 70
Step size: 1
Units: Degrees Celsius
Comments: This parameter specifies the TSC temperature threshold above which the TSC should
raise a Temperature Alarm.
EAS (Environmental Alarm System) Poll Timer

Range: 1 to 200
Default: 5
Step size: 1
Units: seconds
Comments: The time delay, in milliseconds, between the polling of the Environmental Alarm
System (EAS) unit in order to determine whether the unit is still operational. The EAS
reports the alarms to the Site controller using an interrupt mechanism. The default
value provides optimal system performance.
Site Trunking Hold off Time

Range: 0, 16-129
Default: 0
Step size: 1
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-53

Site Controller - General Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Units: seconds
Comments: This field is used to specify how long the remote site should hold off informing MSs
that the site is in site trunking mode. The trunking status change may be caused by
the loss of the link between the Zone Controller and the remote site.. This time is a
combination of the 'site trunking indication hold off' + 'trunking recovery timeout' + 10
seconds as entered in the system parameters on the Zone Manager. If the 'site trunking
indication hold off' is 0 then the 'trunking recovery timeout' is ignored and there is no
addition of 10 seconds.
Site Link Debounce Time
Range: 2 - 120
Default: 2
Step size: 1
Units: seconds
Comments: This field is used to determine how long the Remote Site (BTS) waits after the link
to the Zone Controller (ZC) has failed before the remote site attempts to contact the
Zone Controller again.
No Trunking BS Service Details
Range: All services or No services
The following applies to EBTS, MBTS (since R6.1 release) and MTS (in
R6.1 SPU Q408, R6.2 SSR R3 and all further releases):
When No trunking BS Service Details parameter is set to No Services
and the base station goes to No trunking mode then the BRs output power
is reduced/eliminated. In such case the BRs does not change its operating
state.
2-54 6802700U57-W October 2010

Default: All services

Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Comments: Defines the serving cell BS Service Details bitmap broadcast by the BTS when the
site is in the No Trunking state. Selecting "All services" results in a bitmap, which
indicates that all services are supported; selecting "No services" results in a bitmap in
which all bits are set to zero. The BS Service Details bitmap is supplied, in its entirety,
to the BRC by the TSC. Then, the BRC takes whatever value is sent to it by the TSC
and broadcasts that value over the air in the SYSINFO PDU. When configured as All
services, the TSC may alter the value of some of the bits supplied to it by the Service
Software, for example the Air Interface Encryption bit, which reflects whether or not
the site is configured for Air Interface Encryption. When configured as No services,
the BTS always broadcasts a zero BS Service Details bitmap in the No Trunking state.
For a complete description of BS Service Details refer to ETSI specification EN 300
392-2, V3.2.1 (2001-03), clause 18.5.2.
Adjacent Site Broadcast Update (R5.2 and R5.5 only)

Range: On (control selected) or Off
Default : On
Step size : N/A
Units : N/A
Scope : Site Controller
Comments : Determines whether the adjacent cell broadcast information is updated 30 seconds after
a site has transitioned to site Trunking due to control link failure.
MTS PSU Operation Mode (only available for MTS)

Range: 1..3, DC, AC, AC/DC
Default: DC (1)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: MTS PSU Operation Mode is used to select the PSU operation mode, depending on
the power source.
The PSU operates in the following modes:

• DC only operation at -48 VDC (within -41 VDC to -60 VDC).
DC operation mode does not allow any battery controlling.
• AC only operation at 110/240 VAC (within 90 VAC to 270 VAC) without battery charging.
• AC operation (within 90 VAC to 270 VAC) and automatic switch over to DC
backup battery operation when AC fails.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-55

Cell State Timers - State Management (Site Controller - General Parameters) Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Cell State Timers - State Management (Site Controller - General

Parameters)
The TETRA Site Controller (TSC) uses the state machines to control the status of the Base
Radios (BRs) and the cell as a whole. The State Management window contains timers, which
control the operation of the cell state machine. Modification of these timers changes the behavior
of the cell in terms of its fault recovery and fault tolerance.
The state machine uses three categories to describe the state: -
Administrative State:
Locked signifies that the cell is attempting to come into service or has been taken out of service
by the Site Controller due to some failure condition or a user request.
Unlocked signifies that the cell is in transition to/or is already in the normal operating state of the cell.
Operational State:
Enabled signifies that no failures currently prevent the cell from being used.
Disabled signifies that a failure condition currently prevents the cell from being used.
Usage State:
Idle signifies that the cell is in an idle state and is awaiting a transition.
Active signifies that the cell is in its normal operating state with no faults. This state is
only possible within the Unlocked Enabled state.
Impaired signifies that the cell is in it's normal operating state but that a fault has occurred
which has impaired the cell but which is not serious enough to disable the cell completely.
This state is only possible within the Unlocked Enabled state.
Cell Lock Enable Idle Timer
Range: 10-600
Default: 60
Step size: 1
Units: seconds
Comments: Timer for the cell state machine that allows a cell in the Locked Enabled Idle state to
perform normal actions.
Cell Unlock Enable Idle Up Timer

Range: 10-600
Default: 150
Step size: 1
2-56 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Cell State Timers - State Management (Site Controller - General Parameters)
Units: seconds
Comments: Timer for the cell state machine that allows a cell in the Unlocked Enabled Idle state to
determine the point at which the cell is assumed to have failed to become active. The
cell is locked and the state machine places the cell in the disabled state.
Setting timer too low causes the cell to fail to reach its operational state.
Cell Unlock Enable Idle Down Timer

Range: 10-600
Default: 60
Step size: 1
Units: seconds
Comments: Timer for the cell state machine that allows a cell in the Unlocked Enabled Idle state
to recover control and move to the disabled state. The timer is required to recover
the cell in the case where the Base Radio failures prevent the cell from achieving
operational status.
Setting timer too low may cause delays in the cell recovery mechanism.
Cell Unlock Enable Imp(aired) Timer

Range: 10-600
Default: 150
Step size: 1
Units: seconds
Comments: Timer for the cell state machine that allows a cell in the Unlocked Enabled Impaired
state to achieve the highest possible operational state. If the main control channel
Base Radio has failed then the cell waits for a control channel reassignment from
the SmartZone controller. If the reassignment does not appear and the timer expires
the cell is locked and placed in the disabled state. If a BR, which is not the main
control channel, had failed then the cell attempts to recover the BR but remain in this
operational but impaired state.
Setting timer too low does not allow the cell to recover in all circumstances.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-57

Cell State Timers - State Management (Site Controller - General Parameters) Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Cell Lock Disable Recov(ery) Timer

Range: 10-600
Default: 150
Step size: 1
Units: seconds
Comments: Timer for the cell state machine that allows a cell in Locked Disabled Idle state to
perform recovery actions. In the case where the cell is being moved to determine
the point at which a new Base Radio (BR) is assigned to the main control channel in
order to enable the cell to reach a state where the communication with the SmartZone
controller can begin.
Setting timer too low may cause unnecessary reassignment of the main control
channel and delay the transition of the cell to the wide trunking state.
Cell Unlock Disable Recov(ery) Timer

Range: 10-600
Default: 60
Step size: 1
Units: seconds
Comments: Timer for the cell state machine that allows a cell in the Unlocked Disabled Idle state to
perform recovery actions.
Setting timer too low may cause the cell to fail to recover.
2-58 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Site Reference
Site Controller - Site Reference
This tab is available for Dimetra R5.2 and higher.

The Site Reference window contains parameters related to external references.
The parameters contained in this window have the following characteristics:
Operation Mode (R5.2 and higher)
Range: • 0 NSC (Normal Sync)(R5.2 and R5.5 only)
• 1 ASC (Automatic Sync)
• 2 FNC (Forced No Sync)
Default: The list of default values by release:
• 0 (Dimetra 5.2 and 5.5 only)
• 1 (D6.0 and higher)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The ETSI standard allows two modes of operation of adjacent cells: Synchronized
and Non-Synchronized relative to the serving cell. The BTS can be configured with
TESS for three (in R5.2 and R5.5) or two (since R6.0) different configurations of
operations which control the change between these modes:
• Normal Synchronized Configuration (NSC) – available only in R5.2 and
R5.5. The BTS works as present D5.1 SW with a few exceptions. If the GPS
fails, the BTS resets at the expiry of the existing configurable free-run timer and
then waits until the GPS is restored before resuming operation, resulting in a
total loss of service from that site. The BTS works only in synchronized mode.
• Automatic Synchronized Configuration (ASC) - In this configuration
there are two modes: synchronized and non-synchronized. The change from
synchronized mode to non-synchronized happens at the expiry of the existing
configurable free-run timer. A return from non-synchronized to synchronized
mode requires a reset (before R6.1) or happens based on the settings of the
Automatic Re-synchronization parameters (since R6.1) when GPS is present.
After a configurable time-out the BTS can start in non-synchronized mode
without GPS.
• Forced Non-Synchronized Configuration (FNC) - The BTS always operates
in non-synchronized mode. The BTS starts up in non-synchronized mode
whether or not the GPS module is present. However, if GPS is present the
OCXO is trained accordingly.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-59

Site Controller - Site Reference Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
GPS Start Up Time Out (for R5.2, R5.5 and R6.0: available for "Operation Mode" set to ASC only)
Range: • 0 (infinite), D6.1 and higher
• 2-100
Default: • 15 (for R5.2, R5.5 and R6.0)
• 7 (since R6.1)
Step size: 1
Units: Minutes
Comments: This parameter configures time out when BTS can start in non-synchronized mode
without GPS. The timer is started when the BTS is started. When the timer runs the
BTS waits for GPS synchronization. If GPS synchronization is achieved before the
expiry of the GPS Start Up Time Out timer the BTS enters synchronized mode of
operation. If GPS synchronization is not achieved the BTS enters non-synchronized
mode at the expiry of this timer.
For MTS mode R6.1 and above when FNC mode is selected, this field is grayed out
and the parameter is set to default value.
In EBTS mode R6.1 and above after FNC mode is selected, the GPS Start Up Time
Out parameter is not visible.
GPS RAIM Enable (Moved here starting from R5.2 from Site Controller – General)
Default: Enabled
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Comments: Specifies whether or not to enable the Time RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring) in the GPS (Global Positioning System). This feature is provided to
handle a specific satellite, which is known to provide a low quality signal. The default
value should be used to provide optimal system performance.
Time RAIM is disabled (GPS Raim Enable = disabled) for MTS mode
when Internal GPS is selected.
GPS Signal Lost Timer (Moved here starting from R5.2 from Site Controller – General; since
R6.1: available for "Operation Mode" set to ASC only)
Range: Infinite, 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, 16 hours, 20
hours, 24 hours, 2 days, 4 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, 1 month, 2 months, 4 months,1 year.
Default: 4 hours
Units: Hours
Comments: Specifies the time that the Site Controller continues to run after the GPS receiver has
lost input signal. The value depends on the stability of the internal oscillator. Warning:
Setting this value greater than the default may mean that the site is unable to maintain
synchronization and can result in call failures.
2-60 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Site Reference
Reference Signal Source (only available for MTS)

Range: 0..1 Internal GPS, External GPS
Default: Internal GPS (0)
Units: N/A
Comments: MTS can use external GPS as Reference Signal Source.
For MTS mode R6.1 and above when FNC mode is selected, this field is grayed out,
and the parameter value is set to 1 (external GPS).
Automatic Re-synchronization when no traffic (since R6.1)

Range: 0..1 (No/Yes)
Default: 1 (Yes)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: If the BTS carries no traffic and the field is set to Yes an automatic re-synchronization
takes place.
Automatic Re-synchronization at a specific time of day (since R6.1)

Range: 0..1 (No/Yes)
Default: 1 (Yes)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: If the Automatic Re-synchronization at a specific time of day field is set to Yes an
automatic re-synchronization on the specified time takes place.
Automatic Re-synchronization time (since R6.1)

Range: 00:00 – 23:59
Default: 03:00
Step size: 1
Units: Minutes
Comments: Sets the time of automatic re-synchronization. If the Automatic Re-synchronization
at a specific time of day field is set to Yes an automatic re-synchronization on the
specified time takes place.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-61

Site Controller - NTP Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Site Controller - NTP Parameters

Network Time Protocol (NTP) tab contains parameters, which are used to configure the Site Controller to
support the operation of the Network Time Protocol, such as IP addresses and port numbers.
Primary NTS IP Address (since R6.1)
Range: 4 fields 0-255
Default (Since 0.0.0.0
R6.1):
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Controller.
Comments: The IP address of the primary Network Time Server. Not configured if the value
is 0.0.0.0.
Secondary NTS IP Address (since R6.1)

Default (Since 0.0.0.0
R6.1):
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The IP address of the Secondary Network Time Server. Not available if Primary
NTS IP Address is set to 0.0.0.0.
Allow NTS For Frequency Locking (since R6.1)
Range: 0 (No) 1 (Yes)
Default: 0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: When set, the configured NTS can be used to lock the frequency of the OCXO if the
NTS accuracy is sufficient. If unchecked the NTS is used for UTD and BTS log
timestamping. Not available if“Primary NTS IP Address” set to 0.0.0.0
2-62 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Address Parameters
Site Controller - Address Parameters

The Addresses window contains system address parameters such as valid radio identity ranges. These
parameters control the range of Mobile Station (MS) addresses that the Site Controller believes to be valid on
the system as well as specifying system identities and offsets required by the Site Controller to process calls.
RCM Address
Range: FFF000(hex) - FFFFFE(hex)
Default: FFF000(hex)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: TETRA identity of the Radio Control Manager (RCM). This value is entered as a
standard 16 (hexadecimal) value.
Emergency Alarm Ack(nowledgement) Status Map(ping)

Range: 0 - 65535
Default: 65535
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: Emergency alarm acknowledgment status mapping used in the TETRA to SmartZone
signaling conversion. This value should be consistent across all BTS in the system.
This value is entered as a normal decimal value.
Site Controller - Address Range Parameters

The Address Ranges window contains system address parameters such as valid radio identity ranges. These
parameters control the range of Mobile Station (MS) addresses that the Site Controller believes to be valid on
the system as well as specifying system identities and offsets required by the Site Controller to process calls.
Gateway ID Min(imum)
Range: F42400(hex)-FFFFEF(hex)
Default: F42400(hex)
Step size: 1
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-63

Site Controller - BRC Interface Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Units: N/A
Comments: Minimum TETRA identity of the Telephone Interconnect Gateway (TIG). This value is
entered as a base 16 (hexadecimal) value. This value is checked to ensure that it is less
than, or equal to, the Telephone Interconnect Gateway (TIG) Address maximum.
Gateway ID Max(imum)
Range: F42400(hex)-FFFFEF(hex)
Default: FFFFEF(hex)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: Maximum TETRA identify of the Telephone Interconnect Gateway (TIG). This value
is entered as a base 16 (hexadecimal) value. This value is checked to ensure that it is
greater than, or equal to, the Telephone Interconnect Gateway (TIG) Address minimum.
Site Controller - BRC Interface Parameters

The Base Radio Controller (BRC) window contains parameters related to the interface between the TETRA
Site Controller (TSC) and the BRC. The BRC is the control unit within the Base Radio (BR).
Load BRC Timer
Range: 40-1000
Default: 100
Step size: 5
Units: seconds
Comments: Timer value used to determine whether loading of application and configuration files
to a BR has failed.
Load BRC Factor

Range: 1.00-10.00
Default: 1.5
Step size: 0.05
Units: N/A
Comments: Modifier to Load BRC Time to assure enough time is given for the download.
2-64 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - BRC Interface Parameters
BRC Boot-up Time

Range: 1-120
Default: 15
Step size: 1
Units: seconds
Comments: Time the TSC waits between downloading the code file and a configuration data file to
a BR. This delay allows the BR to transition from its boot ROM to the main application.
Slow Download BRC Reset Timer

Range: 1-60
Default: 5
Step size: 1
Units: minutes
Comments: Time the BR delays before resetting itself to guard against TSC/BR download failures
when the TSC performs a slow download. Slow downloads occur when a BR is loaded
while the site is already in operation.
Fast Download BRC Reset Timer

Range: 1-60
Default: 2
Step size: 1
Units: minutes
Comments: Time the BR delays before resetting itself to guard against TSC/BR download failures
when the TSC performs a fast download. Fast downloads occur when a BR is loaded
as part of the site initialization procedures. This is the normal mode in which a BR
is loaded.
BRC Registration Retries

Range: 3-10 (corresponds to 45 - 150 seconds)
Default: 6 (corresponds to 90 seconds)
Step size: 1 (corresponds to 15 seconds)
Units: N/A
Comments: On receiving a registration from a BR the TSC acknowledges the registration and
attempt to load the BR with application and configuration data. This parameter
controls the number of times a registration is received and a subsequent download is
attempted by the TSC before an error report is generated.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-65

Site Controller - BRC Interface Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
This parameter controls the amount of time following a TSC reset or switchover that
the TSC waits for a registration response from a BR before flagging it as failed and
taking corrective action. The retry period is fixed at 15 seconds and the parameter
sets the number of retry attempts. In a BTS configured to have an Auto-Standby
BR, this parameter effectively sets the delay before the redundant BR is switched
in to replace a failed unit. A value of 6 is recommended in this situation. Setting
the value too low can result in a healthy unit being diagnosed as failed if it does
not register in time, leading to the redundant BR being switched in unnecessarily.
Main Control Channel Setup Timer

Range: 0-60
Default: 1
Step size: 10
Units: seconds
Comments: Timer value used to limit the time the TSC waits for a response from a BRC to a
control channel setup request.
Legacy Dual Band Roaming Supported (In releases prior to D70 this parameter was
called Dual Band Roaming Supported.)
Range: 1-2 (Yes = 1, No = 2)
Default: 2
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Comments: When enabled it causes extension field in D-NWRK-BROADCAST to support roaming
between frequency bands.
When enabled it causes extension field in D-NWRK-BROADCAST to support roaming
to legacy 380-400MHz and 410-430MHz sites (Pre 6.2SSR R4).
When the eMTS (mixed band MTS - supporting eTETRA) works with the ZC that does not support
eTETRA, then this parameter should be enabled (set to Yes) on this eMTS and on all adjacent sites.
2-66 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Master Site Interface Parameters
Site Controller - Master Site Interface Parameters

The Master Site window contains parameters related to the interface between the BTS and the Master Site.
Link Recovery Timer
Range: 5 to 99
Default: 5
Step size: 1
Units: seconds
Comments: This time specifies the time period for the Remote Site (BTS) to remain in the no
trunking state after all conditions are met for the site to transition to site trunking or
wide trunking. This time period also applies before the site can transition from site
trunking to wide trunking.
Control Channel DLCI (Not used in R5.0 and higher)
Range: 0-1023
Default: 101
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI) is used in frame relay communications to
identify the permanent virtual circuit used to communicate control channel information
to the zone controller. This value should match the DLCI programmed in the Site
Link Multiplexer (SLM).
Packet Data DLCI (Not used in R5.0 and higher)

Range: 0-1023
Default: 102
Step size: 1
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-67

Site Controller - Master Site Interface Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Units: N/A
Comments: This Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI) is used in frame relay communications
to identify the permanent virtual circuit used to communicate with the Packet Data
Gateway. This value should match the DLCI programmed in the Site Link Multiplexer
(SLM).
Network Manager DLCI (Not used in R5.0 and higher)

Range: 0-1023
Default: 104
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This DLCI is used in frame relay communications to identify the permanent virtual
circuit used to communicate with the Zone Manager. This value should match the
DLCI programmed in the Site Link Multiplexer (SLM).
Short Data Transport DLCI (Not used in R5.0 and higher)

Range: 0-1023
Default: 103
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This DLCI is used in frame relay communications to identify the permanent virtual
circuit used to communicate Short Data Messages to/from SDR. This value should
match the DLCI programmed in the Site Link Multiplexer (SLM).
Primary Zone Controller IP Address (Not used in R3.8)

Default R5.0: 10.1.231.1
Default R5.1: 10.1.231.255
Default 10.1.231.255
R5.2/R5.5:
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter allows the Primary Zone Controller IP Address to be configured.
2-68 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Master Site Interface Parameters
Secondary Zone Controller IP Address (Not used in R3.8)
Default R5.0: 10.1.232.1
Default R5.1: 10.1.232.255
Default 10.1.232.255
R5.2/R5.5:
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter allows the Secondary Zone Controller IP Address to be configured.
Zone Controller IP Address One (Not used in R5.0 and higher)
Default: 10.101.0.1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter allows the IP address of the Zone Controller to be set for communication
between the BTS and the Master Site.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-69

Site Controller - Master Site Interface Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Zone Controller IP Address Two (Not used in R5.0, R5.1 and higher)
Default: 10.201.0.1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter allows the IP address of the Zone Controller to be set for communication
between the BTS and the Master Site.
Zone Controller IP Address Selector (Not used in R5.0 and higher)
Range: Zone Controller IP Address One or Zone Controller IP Address Two
Default: Zone Controller IP Address One
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Comments: Used to select the Zone Controller IP address which the Site Controller uses. This
enables the BTSs across the system to be distributed evenly between the two IP
addresses of the Zone Controller for NIC channel loading.
BTS IP Address (Not used in R3.8)
Default: 10.128.1.1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter allows the BTS IP Address to be configured. The default value is
0.0.0.0, which means that the IP address is not configured.
2-70 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Site Router Parameters
BTS IP Network Mask
Default: 255.255.255.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter allows the IP Network Mask of the BTS IP address to be set for
communication between the BTS and the Master Site.
BTS ZC IP Address (Not used in R5.0 and higher)
Default: 10.101.64.1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter allows the IP address of the BTS to be set in the BTS for communication
between the BTS and the Zone Controller. The parameter shall be displayed and set
using the normal IP dot notation, for example: 18.123.5.209
Site Controller - Site Router Parameters

The Site Router window contains advanced parameters, which are used to configure the Site Controller
regarding to the router functionality. They are only available on the highest password access level.
These parameters apply to protocols required to communicate with the

Central Network Equipment (CNE). Modifying these parameters may prevent
the TSC from establishing and maintaining essential connections, cause
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-71

Site Controller - Site Router Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
severe communications problems when the system is under load and cause
undesirable behavior in failure/recovery scenarios. These parameters should
not be changed without guidance from Dimetra Engineering!
If the Site Link Interface Type parameter is set to Ethernet Site Link then all options related to E1 and X21
links which are accessible via Site Router and Site Link tabs are disabled. The disabled options are not
relevant for the Ethernet site link, and can be ignored. Similarly, if the Site Link Interface Type parameter is
set to either "X.21" or "E1", all options in the Ethernet Site Link tab are non-relevant and disabled.
CRTP Enable (Not used in R3.8)
Range: Yes/No
Default: Yes
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Comments: The parameter specifies the use of CRTP protocol used over the site link. Normally
enabled.
CRTP Context State Packet Time (Not used in R3.8)

Range: 100 - 600000
Default: 250
Step size: 1
Units: ms
Comments: The parameter specifies the CRTP Context State Packet Retransmission Time in
milliseconds. This retransmission should normally happen in the event of not
receiving a CRTP full-header packet to resynchronize CRTP reception. This value
should be set to a low value to force CRTP resynchronization in the shortest possible
time in the event of packet loss on the communications link.
CRTP Stale Session Timeout (Not used in R3.8)

Range: 100 - 999999
Default: 1000
Step size: 1
Units: ms
Comments: The parameter specifies the CRTP Session Timeout Time in milliseconds.
2-72 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Site Router Parameters
LMI Enable (Not used in R3.8)

Range: Yes/No
Default: Yes (No for R5.1 SCO)
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Comments: The parameter specifies the status of the LMI protocol used over the site link. Normally
enabled; can be disabled for testing purposes.
While enabling associated counters are reset.

LMI protocol general
The LMI protocol (ANSI T1.617) specifies three counters and two timers for its control.
The counters are referred to as N391, N392, and N393. The timers are referred to as T391
and T392. The T392 timer is not used in the TSC.
LMI LIV Time (Not used in R3.8)
Range: 100 - 999999
Default: 300
For Satellite Links this parameters should be amended to 1000 to allow

for the increased link delays, otherwise the link is not establish or drops
regularly.
Step size: 1
Units: ms
Comments: This is timer T391 of the LMI protocol. Every T391 milliseconds a Status Enquiry
message is sent over the site link. Most of these messages request a link integrity
verification. Once every N391 cycles of this timer the message requests a full status of
all PVCs.
LMI Error Threshold (Not used in R3.8)

Range: 1 - 10
Default: 3
Step size: 1
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-73

Site Controller - Site Router Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Units: N/A
Comments: This is counter N392 of the LMI protocol. The parameter specifies the maximum
number of unacknowledged responses to full status or link integrity verification
messages before shutting down the PVC. It is used for determining a service-affecting
condition by detecting that N392 of the last N393 events are errors. N392 should be
less than or equal to N393.
Full Status Polling Counter (Not used in R3.8)

Range: 1 - 255
Default: 6
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This is counter N391 of the LMI protocol. The parameter specifies the Full Status
Polling Counter.
Monitored Events Count (Not used in R3.8)

Range: 1 - 10
Default: 4
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This is counter N393 of the LMI protocol. The parameter is used for determining a
service-affecting condition by detecting that N392 of the last N393 events are errors.
Type Of Service Latency Time (Not used in R3.8)

Range: 0 - 999999
Default: 5000
Step size: 1
Units: ms
Comments: This parameter specifies the amount of low priority packets in terms of the time to
transmit the packets, to be committed for transmission in the hardware. This parameter
is used to balance the delivery of higher priority audio packets without affecting the
general performance of the system when processing low priority non-audio packets.
The already ongoing transmission of a lower priority frame or fragment is not
aborted. Thus, values lower than a system inherent minimum time are not enforced.
This parameter mainly controls a trade-off between delays in voice data and system
performance.
2-74 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Site Link Parameters
Frame Relay Fragmentation Size (Not used in R3.8)

Range: 0, and 32 - 1024
Default: 100
Step size: 1
Units: Bytes
Comments: Maximum fragment size in octets (including FR header) used during fragmentation.
Frame relay fragmentation is disabled through setting the fragment size to disabled
(0). Since the ongoing transmission of a fragment is not aborted when higher priority
data is to be sent, this parameter controls the type of service minimum latency.
Site Controller - Site Link Parameters

If the Site Link Interface Type parameter is set to Ethernet Site Link then all options related to E1 and X21
links which are accessible via Site Router and Site Link tabs are disabled. The disabled options are not
relevant for Ethernet site link, and can be ignored. Similarly, if the Site Link Interface Type parameter is
set to either "X.21" or "E1", all options in the Ethernet Site Link tab are non-relevant and disabled.
This window contains parameters, which are used to configure the Site Controller
with regard to the Site Link functionality.
Parameters described in this section are not supported for configuration in the
Dimetra IP Micro / Dimetra LiTE release.
Primary PVC DLCI
Range: Disabled, 0 - 1023
Default: 16
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
identify the Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) used to communicate with the Master Site.
This value should match the DLCI programmed in the WAN switch.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-75

Site Controller - Site Link Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Secondary PVC DLCI

Range: Disabled, 0 - 1023
Default: 17
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
identify the Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) used to communicate with the Master Site.
This value should match the DLCI programmed in the WAN switch.
Primary PVC BTS IP Address
Default: 172.24.16.6
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter allows the IP Address of the Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) to be set
for communication between the BTS and the Master Site. The parameter is displayed
and set using the normal IP dot notation, for example: 172.24.16.6
Primary PVC Core Router IP Address

Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This is the IP address of Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) endpoint on the Core Router.
Primary PVC IP Network Mask

Default: 255.255.255.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The parameter allows the IP Network Mask of the Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC)
to be set for communication between the BTS and the Master Site. The parameter is
displayed and set using the normal IP dot notation, for example: 255.255.255.0
2-76 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Site Link Parameters
Primary PVC Recovery Timer

Range: 5 - 120
Default: 30
Step size: 1
Units: Seconds
Comments: In case where the primary PVC recovers after a failure, the TSC starts this timer and
sends LMI messages to the WAN switch with LMI status down for the primary PVC.
When the timer expires the TSC sends LMI status up messages for the primary PVC
to the LAN switch. This delay period allows the multicast IP addressing to converge
so that voice traffic is handled correctly.
Secondary PVC BTS IP Address

Default: 172.24.20.6
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter allows the IP Address of the Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) to be
set for communication between the BTS and the Master Site. The parameter shall be
Secondary PVC Core Router IP Address

Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This is the IP address of Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) endpoint on the Core Router.
Secondary PVC IP Network Mask

Default: 255.255.255.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The parameter allows the IP Network Mask of the Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) to
be set for communication between the BTS and the Master Site. The parameter shall be
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-77

Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Netcom Outbound UDP Port Number

Range: 0 - 65535
Default: 1050
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The parameter specifies the IP Port number on which the BTS receives UDP (Netcom)
packets sent by the Zone Controller.
Netcom Inbound UDP Port Number

Range: 0 - 65535
Default: 1051
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The parameter specifies the IP Port number on which the BTS communicates UDP
(Netcom) packets to the Zone Controller.
Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link

Parameters described below are accessible via Ethernet Site Link tab in the Site Controller dialog of the
TESS tool. Those parameters are divided into several groups, each group is configured in separate dialog:
• General Parameters
• Network Parameters
• QOS Parameters
• Encryption Parameters
• BFD Parameters
• Local Gateway Parameters
Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link General Parameters

Sitelink Type
Range: single (1)
dual (2)
inside_ring (3)
ring_edge (4)
Default: single (1)
Step 1
size:
2-78 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link Network Parameters
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Com- This parameter should be set to Single whenever BTS is connected to GBN Network ONLY
ments: over Primary WAN interface. This option is valid for stand alone BTS and for all BTS(es)
deployed in a Line (daisy chain) topology. Dual option shall be chosen whenever stand alone
BTS is connected to GBN Network over Primary AND Secondary WAN interface. For details
regarding configuration of Primary and Secondary WAN Interface, please refer to: "Site
Controller - Ethernet Site Link Network Parameters" section."Ringe_edge" option shall be
always used for2 BTSes deployed in a Ring topology, which have direct connection to GBN
network (that is connection that doesn’t go through other BTSes in a Ring). For all other BTSes
deployed in a Ring topology "inside_ring" option shall be used.
Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link Network Parameters

This dialog allows the user to configure Layer 3 (WAN and Gateway IP addresses, IP tunnels,
fragmentation)and Layer 2 (VLAN Tagging) parameters related to Ethernet Site Link public (WAN) interfaces.
IP address of Primary WAN Interface cannot belong to any other subnet configured
on TSC. Those subnets are BR subnets with eth0 and eth1 interfaces, site
link subnets with PVC and BTS interfaces.
Primary WAN Interface – IP Address
Range: 4 x 0-255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines the IP address for Ethernet sitelink Primary WAN Interface
(visible as Vlan1 on TSC mmi). Appropriate IP address shall be obtained either
from the IP Plan(See Appendix B of the Service Manual) or from ISP provider
(providing that IP addresses of WAN interfaces specified in the IP Plan conflict with
ISP addressing scheme). Default value indicates that this parameter is not initialized
and must be configured by user.
Primary WAN Interface – IP Netmask

Range: 4 x 0-255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-79

Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link Network Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines the IP Network mask of Ethernet Site Link Primary WAN
Interface (visible as Vlan1 on TSC mmi). Appropriate mask shall be obtained
either from IP Plan(See Appendix B of the Service Manual) or from ISP provider
ISP addressing scheme). Default value of this parameter might not be valid and should
be overridden by user.
Primary WAN Interface – IP Gateway

Range: 4 x 0-255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines the IP address of Layer 3 gateway connected to Ethernet site
link Primary WAN Interface. Default value of 0.0.0.0 indicates that Ethernet site
link is connected over Layer 2 GBN Network and no Layer 3 gateway is present. If
Ethernet site link is connected over Layer 3 GBN Network, then default value must be
overridden by user and shall be obtained from ISP provider.
Primary WAN Interface – VLAN ID

Range: 1-4095
Default: 0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines 802.1Q VLAN ID for Ethernet site link Primary WAN Interface.
Appropriate VLAN ID shall be obtained either from IP Plan(See Appendix B of the
Service Manual) or from ISP provider (providing that VLAN IDs specified in the IP
Plan conflict with ISP addressing scheme). Default value indicates that this parameter
is not initialized and must be configured by user.
Primary WAN Interface – VLAN Tagging

Range: on (1)
off (2)
auto (3)
Default: auto (3)
Step size: 1
2-80 6802700U57-W October 2010

Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: This parameter enables (on) or disables (off) 802.1Q VLAN tagging for packets
transmitted over Primary WAN Interface. Value of this parameter should be agreed
with ISP provider. Usually this parameter should be set to 'on' when MTS site link is
connected to Layer 2 Network (IP Gateway is set to 0.0.0.0) and to 'off' when MTS
site link is connected to Layer 3 Network over IP Gateway. Auto option means that
VLAN tagging shall be automatically enabled for Layer 2 Ethernet links and shall be
automatically disabled for Layer 3 Ethernet links.
IP address of Secondary WAN Interface cannot belong to any other subnet

configured on TSC. Those subnets are BR subnets with eth0 and eth1 interfaces,site
link subnets with PVC and BTS interfaces.
Secondary WAN Interface Disabled
This parameter is not supported for configuration in the Dimetra IP Micro

/ Dimetra LiTE Systems release.
Range: on (2)
off (1)
Default: on (2)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: This parameter enables or disables the secondary WAN interface. If it is checked
settings connected with the secondary interface are blocked.
Secondary WAN Interface – IP Address
This parameter is not supported for configuration in the Dimetra IP Micro

/ Dimetra LiTE Systems release.
Range: 4 x 0-255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-81

Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines the IP address for Ethernet Site Link Secondary WAN Interface
(visible as Vlan1 on TSC mmi). Appropriate IP address shall be obtained either
ISP addressing scheme). Default value indicates that this parameter is not initialized
and must be configured by user.
Secondary WAN Interface – IP Netmask
This parameter is not supported for configuration in the Dimetra IP Micro / Dimetra LiTE release.
Range: 4 x 0-255
Default: 255.255.255.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines the IP Network mask of Ethernet Site Link Secondary WAN
Interface (visible as Vlan1 on TSC mmi). Appropriate mask shall be obtained either
ISP addressing scheme). Default value of this parameter might not be valid and should
be overridden by user.
Secondary WAN Interface – IP Gateway
Range: 4 x 0-255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines the IP address of Layer 3 gateway connected to Ethernet Site
Link Secondary WAN Interface. Default value of 0.0.0.0 indicates that Ethernet site
link is connected over Layer 2 GBN Network and no Layer 3 gateway is present. If
Ethernet site link is connected over Layer 3 GBN Network, then default value must be
overridden by user and shall be obtained from ISP provider.
2-82 6802700U57-W October 2010

Secondary WAN Interface – VLAN ID
Range: 1-4095
Default: 0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines 802.1Q VLAN ID for Ethernet site link Secondary WAN
Interface. Appropriate VLAN ID shall be obtained either from the IP Plan(See
Appendix B of the Service Manual) or from ISP provider (providing that VLAN IDs
specified in the IP Plan conflict with ISP addressing scheme). Default value indicates
that this parameter is not initialized and must be configured by user.
Secondary WAN Interface – VLAN Tagging
Range: on (1)
off (2)
auto (3)
Default: auto (3)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: This parameter enables (on) or disables (off) 802.1Q VLAN tagging for packets
transmitted over Secondary WAN Interface. Value of this parameter should be agreed
with ISP provider. Usually this parameter should be set to on when MTS site link is
connected to Layer 2 Network (IP Gateway is set to 0.0.0.0) and to off when MTS
site link is connected to Layer 3 Network over IP Gateway. Auto option means that
VLAN tagging shall be automatically enabled for Layer 2 Ethernet links and shall be
automatically disabled for Layer 3 Ethernet links.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-83

Primary IP Tunnel – Remote IP Address
Local IP address of Primary IP Tunnel shall be detected automatically, there-

fore it is not configurable by a user.
Range: 4 x 0-255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines destination IP address for packets transmitted from MTS over
Primary IP Tunnel. This parameter must be set to the IP address assigned to the
WAN interface of the corresponding Core Router at which this particular tunnel is
terminated. Default value indicates that this parameter is not initialized and must be
configured by user. Local IP address of Primary/Secondary IP Tunnel shall be detected
automatically, therefore it is not configurable by a user.
Primary IP Tunnel – Fragmentation Size

Range: auto (0), 100 - 1400
Default: auto (0)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines maximum size of payload data that can be transported inside
Primary IP Tunnel. It is recommended not to change value of this parameter (leave it
set to its default). Auto option means that IP Fragmentation size shall be automatically
calculated during initialization of BTS as a maximum allowed value for a given CBS
and EBS parameters.
Secondary IP Tunnel Disabled

Range: on (2)
off (1)
Default: on (2)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: This parameter enables or disables the secondary IP Tunnel. If it is checked settings
connected with the second tunnel are blocked.
2-84 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link QOS Parameters
Secondary IP Tunnel – Remote IP Address
Local IP address of Secondary IP Tunnel shall be detected automatically,

therefore it is not configurable by user.
Range: 4 x 0-255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines destination IP address for packets transmitted from MTS
over Secondary IP tunnel. This parameter must be set to the IP address assigned to
the WAN interface of the corresponding Core Router at which this particular tunnel
is terminated. Default value indicates that this parameter is not initialized and must
be configured by user.
Secondary IP Tunnel – Fragmentation Size
This parameter cannot be configured in the Dimetra IP Micro / Dimetra LiTE Systems release.
Range: auto (0), 100 - 1400
Default: auto (0)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines maximum size of payload data that can be transported inside
Secondary IP tunnel. It is recommended not to change value of this parameter (leave it
set to its default). Auto option means that IP Fragmentation size shall be automatically
calculated during initialization of BTS as a maximum allowed value for a given CBS
and EBS parameters.
Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link QOS Parameters

In this dialog a user can determine which traffic shall be classified as High Priority (Green)
or Lower Priority (Yellow). Additionally the bandwidth throttling parameters (CIR, CBS,
EIR, EBS, CF)can be configured for each traffic type.
Green Traffic Color Map
Range: 7-0, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, ... 7-7 where:
7–0 represents the following set of digits: (7,6,5,4,3,2,1,0)
7-7 represents digit (7)
Default: 7-0
Step size: 1
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-85

Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link QOS Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines the continuous range of precedence values in TOS field
of external IP header that shall be used by high priority Ethernet site link traffic
(referred to as Green traffic). Traffic using priorities assigned to this map, shall be
throttled before transmission on the Ethernet site link according to the CIR and CBS
parameters. By default all precedence values are assigned to Green Traffic Color Map.
This map cannot be empty and must contain at least single precedence with value 7
(corresponding to highest priority traffic).
Yellow Traffic Color Map

Range: NULL, 0-0, 1-0, 2-0, 3-0, ... 6-0 where:
6–0 represents the following set of digits: (6,5,4,3,2,1,0)
0-0 represents digit (0)
Default: NULL
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines the continuous range of precedence values in TOS field of
external IP header that shall be used by lower priority Ethernet site link traffic (referred
to as Yellow traffic). Traffic using priorities assigned to this map, shall be throttled
before transmission on the Ethernet site link according to the EIR and EBS parameters.
By default this map is empty, indicating that all traffic is Green.
When GBN Network is not able to classify traffic to appropriate color (Green or
Yellow) based on the precedence bits it means that such network operates in Color
Blind mode. In such case Yellow Color Map must be empty.
QOS CIR
Range: 64-10240
Default: 512
Step size: 1
Units: kbps
Scope: TSC
Comments: This parameter defines maximum average rate with which Green (high priority) traffic
can be transmitted over Ethernet link. CIR value shall be agreed with ISP provider and
cannot exceed speed of a 'last mile' link (DSL line for example).
QOS CBS
Range: 200-10000
Default: 400
Step size: 1
2-86 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link QOS Parameters
Units: bytes
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines maximum burst size of Green (high priority traffic) that can
be sent over the Ethernet Site Link with speed specified by CIR parameter. It is
recommended not to change value of this parameter (leave it set to its default).
QOS EIR
Range: 0-10240
Default: 0
Step size: 1
Units: kbps
Scope: TSC
Comments: This parameter defines maximum average rate with which Yellow(lower priority)
traffic can be transmitted over the ethernet link. EIR value shall be agreed with ISP.
Default value indicates that this parameter is not initialized and must be configured by
user if Yellow Traffic Color Map is not empty.
QOS EBS
Range: 0, 200-10000
Default: 0
Step size: 1
Units: bytes
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines maximum burst size of Yellow (lower priority traffic) that can
be sent over Ethernet site link with speed specified by EIR parameter. Default value
indicates that this parameter is not initialized and must be configured by user if Yellow
traffic color map is not empty.
QOS Coupling Flag

Range: 1 (on)
2 (off)
Default: 2 (off)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: This parameter is only relevant when Yellow Traffic Color Map is not empty. When
this parameter is set to on and all EIR bandwidth has been consumed, Yellow traffic
can use remaining part of CIR bandwidth that is not utilized by Green traffic at the
particular moment. When this parameter is set to off,Yellow traffic can utilize only
EIR bandwidth and cannot "borrow" capacity from the CIR bandwidth.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-87

Site Controller - BFD Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Site Controller - BFD Parameters
These Parameters are not applicable for Dimetra IP Micro / Dimetra LiTE Systems.
BFD Enable
Range: 1 (on)
2 (off)
Default: 2 (off)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter enables or disables BFD protocol for ethernet site link.
BFD Tx Interval
Range: 1-10000
Default: 300
Step size: 1
Units: milliseconds
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines Tx interval for BFD protocol.
BFD Tx Detect Multiplier

Range: 1-10
Default: 3
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines detect multiplier for BFD protocol.
Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link Encryption Parameters
Those Parameters are not applicable for current releases of Dimetra IP and Dimetra IP Micro
/ Dimetra LiTE Systems. Dialog button corresponding to those parameters was added in the
Ethernet links tab only as a placeholder and is blocked in current version of TESS.
2-88 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Local Gateway Parameters
Site Controller - Local Gateway Parameters

LG Enable
Range: 1 (on)
2 (off)
Default: 2 (off)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: This parameter is used for enable or disabling local gateway feature.
Advertise Trunking Flag

Range: wide(1)
local(2)
Default: local(2)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter determines if BTS shall advertise Local or Wide Area Trunking when
operating in Local Gateway Trunking.
LG BTS Site ID
Range: 96–100
Default: 96
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The assigned identity of the BTS used in communications with the Zone Controller
while operating in Local Gateway mode. A unique value is required for each BTS
in a zone.
LG BTS IP Address
Range: 4 x 0-255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines the BTS interfaces IP address for 2nd MSO while running
Local Gateway feature.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-89

Site Controller - Local Gateway Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
LG BTS IP Mask
Range: 4 x 0-255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines the BTS interfaces IP mask for 2nd MSO while running Local
Gateway feature.
LG Primary WAN Gateway

Range: 4 x 0-255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines the gateway address of ethernet sitelink primary WAN for 2nd
MSO when operating in LG mode. If set 0.0.0.0 it means L2 access.
LG Secondary WAN Gateway

Range: 4 x 0-255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines the gateway address of ethernet sitelink secondary WAN for
2nd MSO when operating in LG mode. If set 0.0.0.0 it means L2 access.
LG Primary Tunnel Remote IP Address

Range: 4 x 0-255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines the primary IP tunnel’s remote address in second MSO in case
of running ETSL and local gateway feature.
2-90 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Local Gateway Parameters
LG Secondary IP Tunnel Enable

Range: 1 (on)
2 (off)
Default: 2 (off)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: This parameter enables or disables the secondary IP tunnel for 2nd MSO.
LG Secondary Tunnel Remote IP Address

Range: 4 x 0-255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter defines the secondary IP tunnel’s remote address in second MSO in
case of running ETSL and local gateway feature.
LG BFD Enable
Range: 1 (on)
2 (off)
Default: 2 (off)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: The parameter enables or disables BFD protocol towards second MSO.
LG Primary PVC BTS IP Address

Default: 172.24.16.6
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter allows the IP Address of the Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) for 2nd
MSO to be set for communication between the BTS and the Master Site. The parameter
is displayed and set using the normal IP dot notation, for example: 172.24.16.6
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-91

Site Controller - Local Gateway Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
LG Primary PVC Core Router IP Address

Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This is the IP address of Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) for 2nd MSO endpoint on the
Core Router.
LG Primary PVC IP Network Mask

Default: 255.255.255.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
for 2nd MSO to be set for communication between the BTS and the Master Site.
The parameter is displayed and set using the normal IP dot notation, for example:
255.255.255.0
LG Secondary PVC BTS IP Address

Default: 172.24.20.6
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter allows the IP Address of the Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) for 2nd
MSO to be set for communication between the BTS and the Master Site. The parameter
shall be displayed and set using the normal IP dot notation, for example: 172.24.20.6
LG Secondary PVC Core Router IP Address

Default: 0.0.0.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This is the IP address of Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) for 2nd MSO endpoint on the
Core Router.
2-92 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Call Parameters
LG Secondary PVC IP Network Mask

Default: 255.255.255.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
for 2nd MSO to be set for communication between the BTS and the Master Site. The
parameter shall be displayed and set using the normal IP dot notation, for example:
255.255.255.0
Site Controller - Call Parameters

The Calls window contains call processing specific parameters such as call timers.
Initial Transmissions
Range: 1 to 15
Default: 4
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The number of transmissions of a control message in an initial burst for messages
that are sent by the system without an acknowledgment requested from the Mobile
Station (MS).
Max(imum) Number of Transmissions
Range: 1 to 15
Default: 4
Step size: 1
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-93

Site Controller - Call Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Units: N/A
Comments: The maximum number of transmissions of a control message for messages that are
sent by the network with an acknowledgment requested from the Mobile Station (MS).
If an MS acknowledges the message before the maximum number of transmissions is
reached then any further transmissions are discontinued.
Call Set up Timer
Range: no change, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60
Default: 30
Step size: As per Range
Units: seconds
Comments: This timer is used during group, private, and interconnect calls to set the maximum
time that the calling radio waits for the call to be through-connected after the call has
been queued (T302). No change is used to inform the radio that no change should be
made to the current stored value.
Private Call Ring Length Timer
Range: no change, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60
Default: 20
Units: seconds
Comments: This timer is used during private calls to set the maximum time that the calling radio
waits for the called radio to answer the call (T302). No change is used to inform the
radio that no change should be made to the current stored value.
2-94 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Call Parameters
Private Call Inactivity Timer
Range: 0 to 60
Default: 30
Step Size: 1
Units: seconds
Comments: During a private call, the system monitors the period of time for which neither party is
transmitting. If the period of inactivity exceeds this time then the call is considered to
have been completed and is terminated by the system.
Call Length Timer
Range: infinite, 30 s, 45 s, 60 s, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min, 5 min, 6 min, 8 min, 10 min, 12 min,
15 min, 20 min, 30 min
Default: 7 min
Units: s/min
Comments: The call length timer limits the maximum length for a call to be active in the Mobile
Station (MS) (T310). The configured value for the call length timer applies to site
trunking calls only, as the Master Site (Zone Controller) runs a call length timer for
wide area group, private and interconnect calls. The timer does not apply to packet data.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-95

Site Controller - Call Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Message Timeout For Site Trunking

Range: 0 to 6
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: seconds
Comments: This timer is used to control the time a site trunking normal group call remains on the
traffic channel after the end of a user transmission. At the end of this 'hang' time the
group members return to the control channel and the call ends. This timer can be
optimized to maximize the use of traffic channels for site trunking. If too short, this can
result in a user in a call receiving 'busy' from the Remote Site (BTS) when a request is
made to continue the call. This timer only applies to normal group calls when a Remote
Site is in site trunking. Emergency group calls in site trunking use a timer value of
30 seconds, which is not configurable.
Site Wide Call Enabled
Range: No, Yes
Default: No
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: Enables or disables the Site Wide Call feature. When this feature is enabled, both the
Site Wide Talk Group and Common Site Wide Talk Group should be set correctly
for this feature to work. When Site Wide Call Enabled is set to No the Site Wide
Talk Group and Common Site Wide Talk Group values are both disabled and no
change of values occurs.
Site Wide Talk Group

Range: 1 - 13,999,999
Default: 1 (use a value specific to your needs)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Enabled State: Enabled if ‘Site Wide Call Enabled’ is “Yes”, otherwise disabled.
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The talkgroup used for communication between the ZM and the TSC for the Site Wide
Call operation. This value should correspond with the ZM setting.
2-96 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Short Data Transport Service Parameters
Common Site Wide Talk Group

Range: 1 - 13,999,999 and 16,777,215
Default: 1 (use a value specific to your needs)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Enabled State: Enabled if ‘Site Wide Call Enabled’ is “Yes”, otherwise disabled.
Scope: Site Wide
Comments: The talkgroup used for communication between the TSC and the BR for the Site
Wide Call operation. This value should preferably be the broadcast group address
(16,777,215 for example: 0xFFFFFF) or alternatively correspond with the talkgroup
setting in the MS.
Site Controller - Short Data Transport Service Parameters

The SDTS screen contains short data processing specific parameters such as TCP IP addresses.
B(ase) T(ranceiver) S(ystem) SDTS IP Address (Not used in R5.0 and higher)
Range: 4x0-255
Default: 10.101.64.3
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter allows the IP address of the BTS to be set in the BTS for Short Data
communication between the BTS and the SDR
S(hort) D(ata) R(outer) IP Address (Not used in R5.2 and higher)

Range: 4x0-255
Default R3.8: 10.1.105.199
Default R5.0: 10.128.105.199
Default R5.1: 10.128.105.199
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The optional parameter allows the IP address of the Short Data Router to be set for
Short Data communication between the BTS and the Master Site. This IP address is
only required when the Short Data Router is on a different IP sub network from the
BTS. The parameter must be set to the IP address of the SDR according to the IP
number plan.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-97

Site Controller - Short Data Transport Service Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
SDR Outbound TCP Port Number (Not used in R5.0 and higher)
Range: 0-65535
Default: 4176
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter specifies the TCP port number to which the SDR outbound service shall
connect for BTS Short Data downlink services.
SDR Inbound TCP Port Number (Not used in R5.0 and higher)
Range: 0-65535
Default: 4177
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter specifies the TCP port number to which the SDR inbound service shall
connect for BTS Short Data uplink services.
SDR TCP Port Number (Not used in R3.8)

Range: 0-65535
Default: 4176
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter specifies the TCP port number to which the SDR shall connect.
S(ide)L(ink)M(ultiplexer) Max Transmission Unit (Not used in R5.0 and higher)

Range: 64-512
Default: 128
Step size: 16
Units: Bytes
Comments: Maximum frame size that the BTS can sent to the SLM or received by the BTS from the
SLM over the X.21 link.
Max(imum) Number of Short Data Repeats

Range: 1-15
Default: 4
Step size: 1
2-98 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Short Data Transport Service Parameters
Units: N/A
Comments: The maximum number of transmissions of a short data message for messages that
are sent by the network with an acknowledgment requested from the Mobile Station
(MS). If an MS acknowledges the short data message before the maximum number of
transmissions is reached then any further transmissions are discontinued.
Max(imum) Number of Short Data Retries
Range: 1-10
Default: 5
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The maximum number of retries performed by the Site Controller sends long
fragmented Short Data PDUs to the MS in the absence of positive confirmation from
the BRC.
Max(imum) TCP Segment Size
Range: 128-1024
Default: 512
Step size: 64
Units: Bytes
Comments: This parameter specifies the maximum size of the TCP packet which is passed to the
IP Layer.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-99

Site Controller - Voice Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
TCP Socket Buffer Size

Range: 20-16384
Default: 8192
Step size: 1
Units: Bytes
Comments: This parameter specifies the size of allocated buffer for TCP send socket.
Site Controller - Voice Parameters

The Voice window contains parameters, which are used to configure the Site Controller for communication
with the master site. These parameters are specific to the routing of voice traffic over the link to the master site.
Receive Voice
Range: 1 Interface - 2 Interfaces
Default: 2 Interfaces
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: TSC
Comments: This parameter indicates that MTS joins to voice multicast group and receives voice
traffic either on single site link interface (when parameter is set to 1 Interface) or 2 site
link interfaces (when parameter is set to 2 Interfaces). This parameter is applicable
when MTS is working with redundant site link configuration or in a ring topology.
This parameter is common for both Ethernet and E1 site links.
Voice Port Number (Not used in R3.8)

Range: 0-65535
Default: 10120
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The parameter specifies the IP Port number on which the BTS communicates Voice
information.
Voice DLCI Table (Not used in R5.0 and higher)

Range: 0-1023
Default: 21 to 48. The default is incremented giving each DLCI in the table a different default
Step size: 1
2-100 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Packet Data Parameters
Units: N/A
Comments: The entries in this table are DLCIs (data link connection identifiers) used in frame relay
communications to identify a PVC (permanent virtual circuit) over the link between
the BTS and the central network equipment. These DLCIs should match the values
programmed in the Site Link Multiplexer (SLM). These DLCIs are used for voice
channel communication. The Service Software provides a table for entry of the DLCIs.
Each Base Radio requires 4 PVCs (1 for each voice channel) and hence requires 4
DLCIs. The Service Software warns the user if the number of DLCIs entered is not a
multiple of 4. The software also ignores any entries that exceed the number of BRs
set in the personality. It should be noted that there always is a redundant entry in this
table as one channel is used for control and is not available for voice. This channel
depends on the number of BRs in the BTS and the control channel configuration in
the Zone Manager. It is recommended that all channel are assigned a DLCI for voice
even though one is not unused. This allows the system to assign the control channel to
the most appropriate BR without loss of voice capacity.
Site Controller - Packet Data Parameters

The Packet Data tab contains parameters, which are used to configure the Site Controller with
parameters related to the packet data feature of the Dimetra system.
Data TX Request Transmissions
Range: 1 - 15
Default: 4
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The number of times the SwMI initiated 'move to the Packet Data Channel (PDCH)'
message is transmitted by the Remote Site (BTS) to the Mobile Station (MS). This
corresponds to the 'Initial Transmissions' parameter for voice control signaling.
Changing this setting has the effect of increasing, or decreasing, the packet data related
signaling on the Main Control Channel (MCCH).
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-101

Site Controller - Packet Data Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
End of Data Transmissions

Range: 1 - 15
Default: 4
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The number of times the SwMI initiated 'move back to the Main Control Channel
(MCCH)' message is transmitted by the Remote Site (BTS) to the Mobile Station (MS)
on the Packet Data Channel (PDCH). This corresponds to the 'Initial Transmissions'
parameter for voice control signaling. Changing this setting has the effect of increasing,
or decreasing, the signaling on the Packet Data Channel (PDCH).
Initial Transmissions on PDCH
Range: 1 - 15
Default: 4
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The number of transmissions made by the Remote Site (BTS) to set up a group
addressed call on the Packet Data Channel (PDCH). This corresponds to the 'Initial
Transmissions' on the Main Control Channel (MCCH). Note that there is no 'late
entry' for packet data.
BTS PD IP Address (Not used in R5.0 and higher)
Default: 10.101.64.2
Step size: 1
2-102 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Packet Data Parameters
Units: N/A
Comments: The parameter allows the IP address of the BTS to be set in the BTS for communication
between the BTS and the Packet Data Gateway. The parameter shall be displayed and
set using the normal IP dot notation, for example: 18.123.5.209.
PD Gateway IP Address (Not used in R5.1 and higher)

Default R3.8: 10.1.105.188
Default R5.0: 10.128.105.15
Default R5.1: 0.0.0.0 (not used)
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The parameter allows the IP address of the Packet Data Gateway to be set for
communication between the BTS and the Master Site.
PD Port Number
Range: 0 - 65535
Default R3.8: 6042
Default R5.0: : 6042
Default R5.1: 10140
Default 10130
R5.2/R5.5
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The parameter specifies the IP Port number on which the BTS communicates with
the Packet Data Gateway.
RNG (Radio Network Gateway) IP Address (Not used in R5.0 and R3.8)
Default: 10.128.105.15
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: It is the IP address of the Radio Network Gateway (RNG).
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-103

Site Controller - Network Management Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Site Controller - Network Management Parameters

The Network Management tab contains parameters, which are used to configure the Site Controller to support
the operation of the network management feature such as IP addresses and port numbers.
Network Mgr IP Address
Default R3.8: 172.16.102.101
Default R5.0: 10.1.233.101
Default R5.1: 10.1.233.101
Default 10.1.233.101
R5.2/R5.5:
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The IP address of the network manager to which alarm and state change reports (SNMP
traps) are sent.
Network Manager Port Number
Range: 0 - 65535
Default: 162
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The port number at which alarms and state change reports are sent to the network
manager.
2-104 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Controller - Network Management Parameters
BTS Network Mgr IP Address (Not used in Dimetra IP Micro / Dimetra LiTE and R5.0
and higher releases, not visible and not exported since R6.1)
Default: 10.1.101.4
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter allows the IP address of the BTS to be set in the BTS for communication
between the BTS and the network manager. The parameter shall be displayed and set
using the normal IP dot notation, for example: 18.123.5.209.
Zone Manager Port Number

Range: 0 - 65535
Default: 161
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: The parameter specifies the port number on which the BTS expects to receive
configuration updates from the network manager.
Primary Zone Controller Subnet Mask (Not used in R5.0 and R3.8)
Default: 255.255.255.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter specifies the mask of the subnet the primary Zone Controller belongs
to. Added to support HADAX switch removal in R5.1.
Secondary Zone Controller Subnet Mask (Not used in R5.0 and R3.8)
Default: 255.255.255.0
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: This parameter specifies the mask of the subnet the secondary Zone Controller belongs
to. Added to support HADAX switch removal in R5.1.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-105

Base Radio Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Base Radio
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The Base Radio configuration window contain parameters, which are specific to a particular Base Radio
within the BTS. Screens are provided for General Parameters and RF specific Parameters. The number of Base
Radios in the BTS is controlled from the main personality screen using the Add and Delete Base Radio buttons.
Site wide carrier parameters such as the base transmit frequency are defined in the Carrier Parameters screen.
Base Radio - General Parameters

The General Parameters window contains general parameters for configuration of a Base Radio (BR).
Factory Password
Range: 6 to 14 printable ASCII characters.
Default: See EBTS PR3.0 Installation, Configuration & Basic Service Manual (EBTS), MBTS
1.0 Installation, Configuration & Basic Service Manual (MBTS), MTS 2 and MTS 4
Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual (MTS)
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Scope: Per Base Radio
Comments: This field defines the login password that gives the user factory access privileges. Each
character in the field is displayed as * rather than the character entered for security
reasons. No password verification is provided for this field.
Field Password
Range: 6 to 14 printable ASCII characters.
Default: See EBTS PR3.0 Installation, Configuration & Basic Service Manual (EBTS), MBTS
1.0 Installation, Configuration & Basic Service Manual (MBTS)
Step size: N/A
Units: N/A
Comments: This field defines the login password that gives the user field service access privileges.
Each character in the field is displayed as '*' rather than the character entered for
security reasons. No password verification is provided for this field.
Cabinet Id(entity)
Range EBTS: 1 to 3
Range MBTS: 1 to 2
Range MTS 4: 1 to 2
2-106 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Base Radio - General Parameters
Range MTS 2: 1 to 2
Range MTS 1: 1 to 2
Default: 1 -> By adding a new BR the next free Cabinet ID/Position ID from default is set as
default value.
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: Identity number of a cabinet in which this BR resides.
The cabinet and position IDs entered here do not set the cabinet and position ID in the Base
Radio, this is done through the BR MMI. The cabinet and position IDs entered in the BTS Service
Software allow the Site Controller to match a configuration file to a physical Base Radio.
Position Id(entity)
Range EBTS: 1 to 4
Range MBTS: 1 to 2
Range MTS 4: 1 to 4 - for cabinet 1
1 to 6 - for cabinet 2
Range MTS 2: 1 to 2
Range MTS 1: 1 to 2
Default: 1 -> By adding a new BR the next free Cabinet ID/Position ID from default is set as
default value.
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: Position number of this BR within the cabinet.
The cabinet and position IDs entered here do not set the cabinet and position ID in the Base
Radio, this is done through the BR MMI. The cabinet and position IDs entered in the BTS Service
Software allow the Site Controller to match a configuration file to a physical Base Radio.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-107

Base Radio - RF Parameters Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Base Radio - RF Parameters

The RF Parameters window contains parameters relating to a single Base Radio (BR). The parameters
define the transmit and receive frequencies used by the BR as well as defining the power output
characteristics of the BR. Site wide carrier parameters such as the base transmit frequency and duplex
spacing are defined in the Carrier Parameters window under Serving Cell parameters.
Extended Band Qualifier
Range: Yes, No
Default: No
Step size: N/A
Units: None
Enabled state: Enabled when eMTS Installed is selected, otherwise disabled.
Comments: Extended band qualifier for the Base Radio (BR) determines in which band the BR
operates (normal band or extended band).
The value of this parameter is spread to the ZC. If the eTETRA feature is enabled
(support for single band mobiles is enabled) in the system the ZC takes the value of
this parameter into account when allocating channels.
Carrier Number
Range: 0 to 4095
Default: 3600 -> By adding a new Base Radio, the next free Carrier Number from default is
set as default value
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Comments: Carrier Number for the Base Radio (BR), used to determine the transmit and receive
frequencies of the BR. This parameter should be set according to the overall system
channel plan specified by the system engineers. Pressing ENTER after inputting a
value causes the TX and RX frequencies in this window to be updated.
Tx. (Transmit) Frequency

Range: 100.00000 to 1000.00000
Default: 390.00000
Step size: 0.0250
Units: MHz
Comments: Transmit frequency of Base Radio. The BTS Service Software calculates and displays
this value for information.
2-108 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Base Radio - RF Parameters
Rx. (Receive) Frequency

Range: 100.00000 to 1000.00000
Default: 380.00000
Step size: 0.0250
Units: MHz
Comments: Receive frequency of Base Radio. The BTS Service Software calculates and displays
this value for information. Frequencies 385.575 MHz and 419.175 MHz on the MTS
are self-quieting and cause a high BER to occur. TESS disallows these frequencies
from being set on the MTS.
Default Tx. (Transmit) Power Level

Range EBTS: 5 to 110
Range MBTS: 3 to 35
Range MTS1: 1 to 10
Range MTS2/4: 2 to 80
Default: 5
Step size: 1
Units: Watts
Comments: Default operating power level for Base Radio.
MTS1:
The minimum output power for the MTS 1 is 1W and the maximum power is 10W.
MTS2/4:
If the low-power Base Radio is connected, the minimum specification is 2W and the
maximum specification is 36W.
If the medium power Base Radio is connected, the minimum specification is 5W and
the maximum specification is 80W.
The actual Transmit Power Level depends on the Power

Amplifier connected to the Base Radio. This value is not
configurable via TESS. Refer to EBTS PR3.0 Installation,
Configuration & Basic Service Manual (EBTS), MBTS 1.0
Installation, Configuration & Basic Service Manual (MBTS),
MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service
Manual (MTS) to learn how these values should be configured.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-109

Adjacent Channel Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Adjacent Channel
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The Adjacent Channel window contains parameters transmitted to the Mobile Stations (MSs) to inform
them of the cells adjacent to the cell they are currently receiving. This information allows the MSs to
quickly find an alternative cell when they move out of range of the current transmitter.
For D6.2 release parameters connected with Adjacent Sites cannot be

viewed, added, deleted, or edited.
In Dimetra IP Micro / Dimetra LiTE systems all sites are adjacent to each other.
Adjacent Site ID
(In D6.2 release this parameter cannot be viewed, added, deleted, or edited.)
Range R3.8: 1 to 64
Range R5.0: 1 to 120
Range 1 to 100
R5.2/R5.5:
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The assigned identity of the Site used in communications with the Master Site for
example the Zone Controller (ZC).
2-110 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Adjacent Channel
Adjacent Site Zone ID

(In D6.2 release this parameter cannot be viewed, added, deleted, or edited.)
Range R3.8: 1 to 16
Range R5.2/R5.5: 1 to 256
Default: 1
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This is the Zone ID of the Site having the Adjacent Channel.
Adjacent Site Subscriber Class (Not used in R5.0 and R3.8) (In D6.2 release this
parameter cannot be viewed, added, deleted, or edited.)
Range: 0 to 65,535
Default: 65,535
Step size: 1
Units: N/A
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: This is the Subscriber Class of a neighbor cell (adjacent site) transmitted (broadcast) by
the Base Radio on the MCCH. The default value is acceptable until communication
with the ZC is established.
Main Carrier Number
Range: 0 to 4095
Default: 0 -> By adding a new Adjacent Channel the next free Main Carrier Number from
default is set as default value
Step size: 1
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-111

Adjacent Channel Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Units: N/A
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: Transmitted (broadcast) by Base Radio on the control channel. This is used to define the
frequency of the downlink main carrier (carrier containing the main control channel) of
a neighboring cell. The carrier number is dynamic following assigned control channels.
Location Area
Range: 0 to 16383
Default: 0
Step size: 1
Units: None
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The adjacent site location area provides a label for the location area of an adjacent
site. It is broadcast by the remote site (BTS) as part of the neighbor cell broadcast
parameters.
Max MS Tx Power (Maximum Mobile Station Transmit Power)
Range: 15 to 45
Default: 35 dBm
Step size: 5
Units: dBm
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The maximum Mobile Station (MS) transmit power is broadcast by the Remote Site
(BTS) to the MS and informs the MS of the maximum power that is allowed to be
transmitted in the adjacent site. It is used to influence the cell selection/reselection
process.
2-112 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Connection menu
Min Rx Acc. Level (Minimum Receiver Access Level)
Range: -125 to -50
Default: -110 dBm
Step size: 5
Units: dBm
Scope: Cell wide
Comments: The minimum receive access level is broadcast by the system to the Mobile Station
(MS) and informs the MS of the minimum received signal level required at the adjacent
site. It is used to influence the cell selection/reselection process.
Connection menu
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Connection Menu is used to initiate the communication with the BTS.

To configure TESS for the connection, refer to "Communication with the BTS".
To initiate the connection (once the options are configured), from the Connection menu, select:
• Connect (only available for Dimetra 5.1 and lower)
• Connect Direct (available for Dimetra 5.2 and higher)
• Connect Modem(not available for MTS and Dimetra 6.1and higher)
• Connect Telnet (available for Dimetra 5.2 and higher)
These commands cause the BTS Service Software to enter Communications Mode. The
communication window provides a user interface with the Site Controller.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-113

Entering Configuration Mode Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
The communication window also has a number of control buttons that perform the main connection
window operations. The actual buttons displayed are dependant upon the connection mode. When
displayed their highlighted state indicates their availability for use. All the displayed buttons have
corresponding entries in the file pull down menu. File transfers are only allowable when the user is
logged onto the Site Controller in configuration "Entering Configuration Mode".
From the communication window, the user also has the possibility of copying and pasting:
Copy Function (shortcut Ctrl+C). This option works as regular MS Windows function: copy
selected text to the clipboard. The user can paste copied data from the clipboard to any application.
Also if selecting the text and clicking the middle mouse button, the selected text will be copied to
the clipboard and pasted to the communication window after prompt.
Paste function (shortcut Ctrl+V). This option works as a regular MS Windows function, paste text
from the clipboard. The user can paste data from clipboard to any application.
"Upload Configuration (Connection Menu)" - Allows the configuration data for both Site Controller and all
Base Radios to be read from the Site Controller, decoded and displayed in the data entry windows.
"Upload Diagnostics (Connection Menu)" - Allows the diagnostics files to be read from the Site
Controller and stored in the BTS Service Software installation directory.
"Send Files (Connection Menu)" - Allows Site Controller and Base Radios application and
configuration files to be transmitted to the Site Controller. The ability to send application files to the
Site Controller is access configurable and may not be available to all users.
"Close Connection (Connection menu)" - Close the communication window (shutting down a modem
connection if one is active and terminating any current file logging session).
"Log To File (Connection menu)" - Displays the File Log Selection window.
"Stop Logging (Connection Menu)" - Terminates the current VT100 file logging session.
In Modem Connection Mode (not available for MTS)
"Dialing Directory (Connection menu)" - Displays the dialing directory - allowing remote sites to be accessed.
"Hang Up (Connection Menu)" - Causes the attached modem to disconnect the telephone connection.
Shortcut
Toolbar: the Icon is active only for releases D5.1 and older.
Keys: CTRL+T
Entering Configuration Mode
This section applies to EBTS TSC only.

Before the operator can use the communications window to transfer files to/from the Site Controller, a
connection must be established and the Site Controller must be in configuration mode. Following the
procedure below ensures that the Site Controller is running in configuration mode.
• If the Site Controller is not currently running then turn on using main power switch.
2-114 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Connect Command
• Wait for the message To enter configuration mode hit 'Return'

within 10 seconds to be displayed.
• Press ENTER and enter your username and the Site Controller password.
• You should now be in configuration mode.
Alternatively
• If the Site Controller is running then press ENTER to get a prompt. There are four
possible outcomes to this. The configuration mode prompt is SC# or SC>, depending on
the password entered (engineering or service respectively). If this is returned then the user
is now able to transfer files between the BTS Service Software and the Site Controller.
If the prompt returned is SC: or SC) depending on the password entered (engineering
or service respectively) then current operation is application mode, the Site Controller
must be reset. Do this by entering reset and pressing ENTER, however it is important
that the following warning is read and understood before doing so.
At this point the user should note that the BTS is currently running the main
application software. Before the Site Controller is reset it should be verified that it is
safe to take the site out of service. The site is unable to support any communication
with the mobile stations or the master site while the file download is in progress.
• Wait for the message To enter configuration mode hit 'Return'

within 10 seconds to be displayed.
• Press ENTER and enter your username and the Site Controller password.
If the prompt returned is lowercase, for example sc#, sc>, sc:, sc, then the user has logged on in
restricted mode. This means that there is currently a user logged onto the other serial port of the Site
Controller. None of the file transfer commands are available to a user in restricted access; the user
on the other port must be 'evicted' before continuing. This is done by typing evict and pressing
ENTER. The prompt changes to upper case and the process may be continued as outlined above.
Connect Command
Only applies to Dimetra 5.1 and lower.

This command causes the BTS Service Software to enter Communications Mode. The communication
window provides a user interface with the Site Controller.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-115

Connect Direct (Connection menu) Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Connect Direct (Connection menu)
Only applies to Dimetra 5.2 and higher.

The main area of the communication window acts as a VT100 terminal allowing the user to interactively
communicate with a Site Controller. The Site Controller can be connected to the BTS Service Software
in three ways: directly connected via a serial cable, using a modem link or telnet connection.
displayed their highlighted state indicates their availability for use. All the displayed buttons
have corresponding entries in the file drop down menu. File transfers are only allowable when
the user is logged onto the Site Controller in configuration mode.
In Direct Connection Mode

Upload Configuration
Not available for D6.0 and higher.

Allows the configuration data for both Site Controller and all Base Radios to be read from the
Site Controller, decoded and displayed in the data entry windows.
Upload Diagnostic

Allows the diagnostics files to be read from the Site Controller and stored in the BTS
Service Software installation directory.
2-116 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Connect Modem (Connection menu)
Send Files

Allows Site Controller and Base Radios application and configuration files to be transmitted
to the Site Controller. The ability to send application files to the Site Controller is access
configurable and may not be available to all users.
Close - Close the communication window (shutting down a modem connection if one is
active and terminating any current file logging session).
Log to File - Displays the File Log Selection window.
Stop Logging - Terminates the current VT100 file logging session.
Connect Modem (Connection menu)
Not available for MTS and Dimetra 6.1and higher.

The main area of the communication window acts as a VT100 terminal allowing the user to interactively
communicate with a Site Controller. The Site Controller can be connected to the BTS Service Software
in three ways: directly connected via a serial cable, using a modem link or telnet connection.
displayed their highlighted state indicates their availability for use. All the displayed buttons
have corresponding entries in the file drop down menu. File transfers are only allowable when
the user is logged onto the Site Controller in configuration mode.
In Modem Connection Mode

Upload Configuration - Allows the configuration data for both Site Controller and all Base Radios to
be read from the Site Controller, decoded and displayed in the data entry windows.
Upload Diagnostic - Allows the diagnostics files to be read from the Site Controller and
stored in the BTS Service Software installation directory.
Send Files - Allows Site Controller and Base Radios application and configuration files to be
transmitted to the Site Controller. The ability to send application files to the Site Controller
is access configurable and may not be available to all users.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-117

Connect Telnet (Connection menu) Chapter 2: Service Software Operation

Dialling Directory - Displays the dialing directory - allowing remote sites to be accessed.
Hang-up - Causes the attached modem to disconnect the telephone connection.
Connect Telnet (Connection menu)
Only applies to Dimetra 5.2 and higher
Connect Telnet New (Connection menu)

This command invokes the Telnet connection Settings. The window provides a user interface to set up
and establish connection to the required location (like Site Controller) with running Telnet server. The
connection and alias name resolving is supported by the LDAP and DNS protocols.
Connect Telnet From Personality (Connection menu)

This menu function is active only when the Site Title (on Site Configuration dialog) contains any
text which is resolved through telnet as the site controller address.
After selecting the item, the connection can be established, if the target telnet server is running.
Shortcuts
Keys: CTRL+R
Connect Telnet Site History (Connection menu)

This menu function is active only when the value of ‘Number of visited sites remembered’ under the General
Settings (Options command) is different from zero and any successful telnet connection was established.
After selecting one of the items, the connection can be established, if the target telnet server is running.
In Telnet Connection Mode

The user has access to the Site Controller or Base Radio through the main area of the communication
window, it acts as a VT100 terminal allowing the user to interactively communicate with it. If
Telnet connection is used to transfer files, the transmission occurs via TFTP.
Upload Configuration
Not available for EBTS and MBTS.
2-118 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Telnet Connection Settings
Allows the configuration data for both Site Controller and all Base Radios to be read from the
Site Controller, decoded and displayed in the data entry windows.
Upload Diagnostic

Allows the diagnostics files to be read from the Site Controller and stored in the BTS
Service Software installation directory.
Send Files

Allows Site Controller and Base Radios application and configuration files to be transmitted
to the Site Controller. The ability to send application files to the Site Controller is access
configurable and may not be available to all users.
Shortcuts
Keys: CTRL+L
Telnet Connection Settings

The dialog provides a user interface to set up and establish connection to the required location (for example Site
Controller) with running telnet server. The alias name resolving is supported by the LDAP and DNS protocols.
Selection of the target server can be set up by entering the site alias at the Site box control. This
control can also store aliases which can be available at the system (see Fetch Aliases below). The
user can select an item from the list, and then press the OK button to establish the connection. The
communication window then appears. The main area of the communication window acts as a VT100
terminal allowing the user to interactively communicate with a Site Controller.
Site - Allows the user to enter or choose the name of the known Site Controller alias.
This is a default option for the dialog.
Zone - Allows the user to select zone alias which is stored in the cache files on the hard drive. This is a
pre-selection for the next step. The control will activate after selecting options control on the left.
Site - After selecting a zone this control contains the appropriate list of sites for the selected zone.
Site IP - This control allows the user to enter the IP address of the requested site without usage of the name
resolving system (as above). However, the user can enter the IP address as described under site above.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-119

Close Connection (Connection menu) Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Fetch Aliases - Allows updating file-cached information about aliases. After pressing the button the dialog
appears, asking the user to get zones and sites names available in the system. The user can agree (pressing
the OK button) or cancel this action (pressing the Cancel button). The Fetch Aliases operation can take
some time. The dialog also contains the information about previous time of aliases update.
Alias cache - The label contains time information of the last alias update (the same
information as mentioned above) .
Device Definition - Allows the user to choose the device to connect to. The numbers of devices
(for example, TSC – TETRA Site Controller, BRC11 – Base Radio Controller placed at cabinet 1
position 1) depend on the chosen BTS type: MBTS, EBTS, MTS 2 or 4.
Close Connection (Connection menu)

Terminates the connection window and returns to the main mode of operation. The personality is accessible
to the user in a state identical to that upon entry into the connection mode unless a set of configuration
files have been uploaded whereby the data decoded resides within the personality.
Closing the connection window with a modem connection still active results in
the modem session being dropped.
If the VT100 output is currently being logged to a file when the Close Connection button is
pressed the user is informed that the file log is closed upon exit. The user haves the option
to continue or discontinue with this course of action.
Shortcuts
Keys: CTRL+X
Dialing Directory (Connection menu)
Available only in Modem Connection Mode.

The Dialing Directory window provides facilities that enable the user to record site names and
their associated telephone numbers and then to subsequently dial those numbers and establish
a communications link with a remote Site Controller.
The following commands are provided in the dialing directory dialog box:
Dialing Directory Entries - Listed here are the names of the sites entered, double clicking upon an
entry within this box causes the number associated with this site name to be dialed.
Name - The site name is entered here. The maximum number of characters allocated for the storage of name
and number is 75 characters. This therefore imposes a restriction on the number of characters that may be
entered into the name box of 75 - length of the phone number. A check is performed when the Add or
Replace buttons are pressed. A warning is displayed for the user if this criterion is exceeded.
2-120 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Log To File (Connection menu)
Number - Enter the telephone number of the site into this edit box. It is possible to enter
alphabetic characters here. These may be required to meet any specific requirements of the
telephone system in use. Please refer to the modem user manual and the "Modem Settings
Command (Configuration Menu)" help page for further information.
Add - This button (which only becomes enabled when both a site name and number have been
entered) is used to add the entered details into the directory.
Delete - This button deletes the entry currently selected in the Dialing Directory Entries list box. It
does not, however, become enabled unless there is a current selection in the list box. The internal
configuration data is only updated when the dialing directory is exited through the OK button. Upon
the depression of the Cancel button the user is prompted with a message informing about the loss of
modification. Entries that have been deleted by mistake can therefore be retrieved.
Replace - Replaces the entry selected in the Dialing Directory Entries list box with the
entries made in the Site Name and Number edit boxes.
Dial - Dials the selected entry in the Dialing Directory Entries list box.
Find - Used to search for entries in the Dialing Directory Entries list box. As characters are typed in to
the edit box the first entry that matches the characters typed so far is automatically selected.
Manual Dial - Dials the number that the user has entered in to the edit box provided. The button only becomes
enabled when a number has been entered. Pressing the ENTER key when the current input focus (the flashing
cursor) resides within the box, and with a number currently entered, causes that number to be dialed.
Modem Status - Provides information to the user whilst the selected or entered number is being dialed.
Dialing therefore, is simply a matter of selecting an entry in the list box or entering one in the Manual Dial
edit box. Then either select Dial or Manual Dial. The modem is dialed and the window closes automatically
when the connection is established. Message is displayed if the link cannot be established. Pressing F1 whilst
these messages are displayed causes a help page to be displayed, which provides assistance with the problem.
Log To File (Connection menu)

This command accessed through the file menu or connection window button launches the File
Log Selection window. This window provides the user with the ability to select or create a file
name in which the output from the VT100 log is written into.
• Select "Connect Command" from the "Main Menu".
• If the current communications routing is modem then a connection will need
to be established. The Log to File button will only become enabled once a
modem connection has been established.
To create a new log file:
• Use the ‘Save in’ and Directories controls to select the desired destination for the log file.
• Enter the new file name into the File Name edit control.
If no file extension is specified then the default extension of .txt is appended. If a legal file extension
other than .txt is specified the file is created but it is never visible in the Log File Selection window.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-121

Stop Logging (Connection Menu) Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
• The Write Mode selector here is irrelevant as we are creating a new file,
changing its state has no effect.
• Click on the OK button or press ENTER
To overwrite or append to an existing log file:
• Use the ‘Save in’ and Directories controls to select the desired destination for the log file.
• Enter the existing file name into the File Name edit control or select the
required file from the selection list.
• Select the required Write Mode. Overwrite existing files will replace any existing files of the
same name with a new file. Append to existing files will augment data to an existing log file.
• Click on the OK button or press ENTER
• If the selected Write Mode is ‘Overwrite existing files’, the user is prompted
to confirm this operation.
Stop Logging (Connection Menu)

Terminates the current logging session. Depression of this button results in the full path
name of the log file being displayed in a message box.
Hang Up (Connection Menu)
Available only in Modem Connection Mode.

Unconditionally causes the attached modem to terminate the telephone connection. This button only
appears on the connection window if the current Routing is set to Modem Routing. The button, and
corresponding menu item become enabled when a connection has been successfully established using the
"Dialing Directory (Connection menu)". This will disconnect any calls in progress at the time.
An established modem connection is terminated upon departure from the connection window.
Send Files (Connection Menu)

This command allows the configuration files and application code files to be transmitted to the Site Controller.
The process relies on the fact that a communications link "Establishing a Communications Link with the
TSC" has been established with the Site Controller in advance. File transfers are only allowable when the
user is logged onto the Site Controller in configuration mode "Entering Configuration Mode".
2-122 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Send Files (Connection Menu)
The Site Controller may contain more that one file with a given name. The filename is appended
with a bank number [1 or 2] (i.e. tsc.cf.1), to uniquely identify it on the target. For file
management purposes, each file on the target has a version number, and a flag "fallback" “current”
or use next". If a file with the same filename has any of these flags set, overwriting is not allowed.
For further information on setting the file download, see"File Transfer Settings (Options screen)".
To Send files to the Site Controller:
• Press the Send Files button on the connection window, or select the Send
Files menu item from the File menu.
• Select the type of file transfer, either Send Configuration or Send Application files.
• Select the drive and directory containing the files required to be sent. Files can only
be selected from a single directory at a time. If the user requires, for example, to
download files from the current working directory and files from another directory,
these have to be sent in two separate operations.
• File selection procedure follows the normal Windows standards:
Left mouse button selects an individual file.
Shift + left mouse button selects a block of file between the last file selected and the current file.
Ctrl + left mouse button adds a single file to those already selected.
Double clicking on an individual file causes the dialog box to be dismissed and the
single file transmitted to the Site Controller.
• If the user selected "Send Configuration", the files to be transferred are first compiled. The
Site Controller file generated is named - <filename>.sc1 and the Base Radio files are named -
<filename>.b0n, where filename is the name of the configuration file (see notes below) and n
is the Base Radio number corresponding to the number of the BR in the Site Configuration
screen. The total number of Base Radio files created is the same as the number or Base Radios
in the personality. If a problem is found during the generation process a message is presented
to the user indicating the error.
Note on Sending BTS Raw Config Files: The send raw config files is useful when
the exact same BTS configuration is required on more than one BTS (i.e. not modified
by the Service Software itself). Typically this would be used to download a set of
converted/modified configuration files generated by the Software Download Manager
to an existing local BTS in order to verify operation.
• The user is presented with version assignment dialog box. All files to be sent to Site
Controller, or configuration file sets, must be assigned a label. The user also has the
option to set "use next" and "fallback" options. All version labels are tested for valid
format and uniqueness amongst both the files already on the target and the files to be
downloaded. If the user selects cancel, the download operation is ceased.
• If more than one file with the same name exists on the target, the user is presented
with at dialog prompting them to select a file to be replaced. If no matching
files, or only one matching file exist on the target, no files need to be selected for
replacement, no prompt appears, and download continues.
This occurs for each configuration file set, or application file to be downloaded. If the
user selects cancel, the download operation is ceased.
See "TSC File Selection" for details.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-123

Upload Diagnostics (Connection Menu) Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
• Commence the download by pressing the OK button. The progress of the files throughout
the duration of the download is monitored by the "Data Transfer Status Window" and
the results displayed in the "File Transfer Status Window".
When files are selected and transmitted to the Site Controller, the actual names are translated
according to the following rules (m = [1,2], n = [1-7]):
*.cfg -> tsc.cf.m, brc01.cf.m, ... brc0n.cf.m
*.tsc -> tsc.code.m
*.brc -> brc.code.m
*.x21 -> x21.code.m
This translation is necessary in order to accommodate the Site Controller, which ex-
pects fixed names for each data file type.
Upload Diagnostics (Connection Menu)

This function invoked from the Upload Diagnostics button on the communication "Connect Command" or
the file menu option, allows the diagnostic data file(s) resident on the Site Controller to be automatically
received and stored by the BTS Service Software. File transfers are only allowable when the user
is logged onto the site controller in "Entering Configuration Mode". The diagnostics files are of
considerable size so the user is able to select any combination for upload.
The procedure for uploading diagnostic Data from the TSC is as follow:
• Select the file(s), which will be uploaded in the ‘Files to upload’ List Box.
The file selection process follows the normal Windows standards:
Left mouse button selects an individual file.
Shift + left mouse button selects a block of file between the last files selected and the new selection.
Ctrl + left mouse button adds a single file to those already selected.
Double clicking upon an individual file selects that file and commences the upload process.
• Select the required disk from the [Save in:] drop down selector where the file(s) should be stored.
• Browse the directory structure to find the desired storage location.
• Press OK to commence uploading.
If one or more files already exists a warning is displayed requesting the user to confirm
the overwrite operation before proceeding.
The progress of the files throughout the duration of the upload is monitored by the "Data Transfer
Status Window" and the results displayed in the "File Transfer Status Window".
No facility is currently available to read the diagnostics files after uploading.
2-124 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Upload Configuration (Connection Menu)
Upload Configuration (Connection Menu)

The BTS Service Software provides facilities that allow configuration data to be read from the Site
Controller. Both Site Controller and Base Radio data may be retrieved using this mechanism.
When the Communications Window screen is displayed the Upload Configuration button is displayed.
If access is not permitted then the button is disabled. The upload command will only be successful if the
user is logged onto the Site Controller in configuration mode, see "Entering Configuration Mode".
The Site Controller may contain more that one file with a given name. The filename is
appended with a bank number [1 or 2] (i.e. tsc.cf.1), to uniquely identify it on the target.
For file management purposes, each file on the target has a version number, a "fallback"
and "use next" flag (see "Setting TSC File Versions" for details)
When uploading configuration files from the TSC the following steps are performed:
• Press the Upload Configuration button on the connection window, or select the
Upload Configuration menu item from the File menu.
• Select a configuration file (tsc.cf) for the list of files available on the Site Controller (see "TSC
File Selection"). If no files are found on the site controller, the user is notified and the upload
ceased. If files are present but none are selected, or the user presses cancel, upload ceases.
• The selected .tsc files are uploaded and compared with Base Radio files on the
TSC. If an inconsistency exists, the user is notified and the upload ceases. Two
possible inconsistencies are described below:
• The number of Base Radios in the configuration has been extracted from the Site Controller.
The number of Base Radio files required by the Site Controller must be equal to the
number with matching version labels located on the Site Controller.
• The Base Radio files must be numbered sequentially, breaks in the sequence are not
allowed. For example: 4 Base Radio files with matching version labels and names
brc01.cf, brc02.cf, brc05.cf, brc06.cf are found on the Site Controller. This is an
invalid sequence and an appropriate message is displayed.
• The corresponding Base Radio files (br0?.cf) is uploaded. If the files are successfully
uploaded the user is presented with the list of the uploaded files. If a problem is detected
during the upload, the user is notified and the upload ceases.
If more than 20 object IDs (see "Unrecognized Object IDs") unrecognized by the
BTS Service Software are read from a file it is rejected.
• The uploaded base radio files are decoded (see "Decoding Configuration Data
Files") and loaded into the working personality, overwriting the information
stored in the personality prior to the upload.
If at any point an error is encountered, or the user selects to cancel upload, the
working personality will be reset to default values.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-125

File Transfer Status Window Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
• Select to either save the uploaded values to disk, or cancel and proceed without saving.
In either case the working personality contains the uploaded configuration.
File Transfer Status Window

This window is displayed at the end of a file transfer either to or from the Site Controller providing
information pertaining to the transfer. The following messages are displayed in this window.
• File transferred - No errors. Applicable when sending files to, or receiving
files from, the Site Controller. This message is displayed alongside a filename
when the file has been successfully transferred.
• Transfer aborted - Too many errors. Applicable when sending files to, or receiving files from,
the Site Controller. This message is displayed when the file has not been able to be transferred.
• File already exists - Not transferred. (only applicable when sending files to the Site
Controller) This message indicates that an identical file already exists in the flash file system
of the Site Controller so there is no need to send this file. The system differentiates and
overwrites files of the same name that are not identical. When uploading files to the BTS
Service Software application existing files in the application directory are always overwritten.
• Remaining file transfer(s) canceled by user. Applicable when sending files to, or receiving
files from, the Site Controller. This message is displayed when the user has depressed the
cancel button on the Data Transfer Status Window. If this operation has occurred during
the upload of configuration files any successfully uploaded files prior to the cancel are not
listed in this window as the decoder requires a full set of configuration files to operate so an
incomplete set has no use. However when canceling a file transfer while sending files to the
Site Controller, information on transfers completed prior to the termination are detailed.
A file transfer that fails during the transfer process may be resumed. The file should be selected as if
it were being transferred for the first time. The BTS Service Software and Site Controller determines
how much of the file was successfully transferred and resume from that point.
Data Transfer Status Window

This window displays details of the file currently being either uploaded from the Site Controller or downloaded
to it. The Current File Progress control gives an indication of the amount of file that has been processed so far.
During a file download the file names undergo a translation. To aid the user's understanding of this process,
the source and destination file names for each file involved in the transfer are displayed during transmission.
When files are selected and transmitted to the Site Controller, the actual names are
translated according to the following rules:
*.sc1 -> tsc.cf
*.b0? -> brc0?.cf
*.tsc -> tsc.code
*.brc -> brc.code
*.x21 -> x21.code
2-126 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Configuration Menu
When uploading files no file name translation takes place so the source and destination
file name are always displayed as the same.
The window also contains a Cancel button. This button may be used to terminate
the current transfer immediately.
Configuration Menu
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The following sections describe the Configuration Menu items.
Direct Routing Command (Configuration Menu)
Not available for Dimetra 5.5 and newer releases.

This option, selected via the main menu command Configuration->Direct Routing, sets the
BTS Service Software communications system to the values entered in the "Direct Settings
Command (Configuration Menu)" area. The "Connect Command" is only displayed with
control buttons that pertain to this mode of operation.
It is possible that an access level could be configured in such a way to allow a user to change
current communications routing but not provide access to the connection window.
Direct Settings Command (Configuration Menu)

This command displays the data entry window for the Direct Serial Port Settings.
Direct Serial Port Configuration
The following selections are used to configure the serial port to which the BTS is attached. The following
should be set to match the BTS Site Controller, see EBTS PR3.0 Installation, Configuration & Basic Service
Manual (EBTS), MBTS 1.0 Installation, Configuration & Basic Service Manual (MBTS) for details.
• Port. Allows the selection of the communications port used. The default value
of COM2 assumes that a mouse is fitted to COM1.
• Speed. Allows the selection of one of the most common baud settings.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-127

Modem Settings Command (Configuration Menu) Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
• Parity. Allows the selection of the type of parity checking required.

• Data Bits. Determines the number of data bits that make up each data frame.
• Handshaking. Sets the data flow control mechanism.
• Stop Bits. Allows the selection of the number of stop bits.
Shortcuts
Keys: CTRL+D
Modem Settings Command (Configuration Menu)
Not available for MTS and since Dimetra 6.1 release.

This command displays the data entry windows for Modem Settings.
The options available allow the user to specify general dialing features and advanced options
like the command strings sent to control the modem. Also provided are settings for the
configuration of serial port to which the modem is connected.
The window is divided up into three areas each of which is described below. Please refer to the user manual
provided with the modem if the settings need to be changed from the defaults provided here.
Modem Configuration
The following commands and selections are used to configure and control the modem itself.
• Initialization string. The BTS Service Software sends the commands to the modem each time
the program is started. This string is automatically prefixed with an 'AT'. AT is a modem
attention command, alone it will synchronize the speed of the serial link between the BTS
Service Software and the modem but is also used as the prefix for all modem commands. Manual
entry of an AT in the initialization string will result in a string that the modem fails to recognize.
• Slow Dialing. If Slow Dialing is selected from the Dialing Options area, this field
displays the string used by the modem to initiate the feature.
• Escape. Enter the command string that is used to reset the modem from any condition or mode.
• Reset. Enter the command string that is used to reset the modem from any condition or mode.
• Suffix. Enter a control character here that will be appended to each command sent to the modem.
The default is <CTRL>M (carriage return), as used with all Hayes compatible modems.
Only control characters are allowed in the range <CTRL>A - <CTRL>Z and must be entered in this
style. If an illegal or unrecognized entry is detected the value is automatically reset to its default.
• Fast Dialing. If Fast Dialing is selected from the Dialing Options area, this field
displays the string used by the modem to initiate the feature.
2-128 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Modem Settings Command (Configuration Menu)
• Error Correction. Enable (left-hand check box) to allow a configuration

string to be entered in the adjacent edit box.
• Data Compression. Enable (left-hand check box) to allow a configuration
string to be entered in the adjacent edit box.
• Dial Tone: If Tone is selected from the Dialing Options area as the dialing method, the
BTS Service Software uses the string displayed in this field to initiate dialing.
• Dial Pulse: If Pulse is selected from the Dialing Options area as the dialing method, the
BTS Service Software uses the string displayed in this field to initiate dialing.
If additional characters are required to the modem dialing command for an outside line
each a particular connection is used, they may be added to the end of the tone dial prefix.
An alternative to this is to prefix the number itself with the outside line access characters
in the "Dialing Directory (Connection menu)". The modem user manual should be referred
to for information relating to special characters, e.g. delay characters.
Modem Serial Port Configuration
The following selections are used to configure the serial port to which the modem is attached.
• Port. Allows the selection of the communications port used as the connection to the modem.
The default value of COM2 assumes that a mouse is fitted to COM1.
• Speed. Allows the selection of one of the most common baud settings. Select the one most
appropriate to the modem installed. The baud rate between the modem and the BTS Service
Software is synchronized upon the reception, by the modem, of an AT command.
• Parity. Allows the selection of the type of parity checking required.
• Data Bits. Determines the number of data bits that make up each data frame.
• Handshaking. If a high-speed or error-correcting modem is being used it may need to
employ one of the handshaking protocols available. The desired method may be selected
from the list provided. This setting configures the BTS Service Software only; it is
necessary to set up the connected modem to use the same handshaking protocol. The
modem user manual should be referred to for more information.
• Stop Bits. Allows the selection of the number of stop bits.
The parity, data bits, and stop bits must be configured to be compatible with the remote Site
Controller. Please refer to EBTS PR3.0 Installation, Configuration & Basic Service Manual
(EBTS), MBTS 1.0 Installation, Configuration & Basic Service Manual (MBTS) for details.
Dialing Options
The following selections are used to select the modems dialing modes.
• Disabled. The dialing options Slow and Fast are deselected.
• Slow. Sets the modem initialization sequence to use Slow Dialing for the modems dialing speed.
• Fast. Sets the modem initialization sequence to use Fast Dialing for the modems dialing speed.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-129

Modem Routing Command (Configuration Menu) Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
• Pulse. Commands the modem initialization sequence to use the command entered
in Dial Pulse (see above) to set the modems dialing method.
• Tone. Commands the modem initialization sequence to use the command entered
in Dial Tone (see above) to set the modems dialing method.
Modem Problems
Failing to dial:
• Check that phone connection is made correctly and that the modem is compatible
with the public telephone network in which it is being used.
• Ensure that the modem settings are correct. The default settings should work with
the majority of modems; however, the settings for the modem that is being used may
differ from these. Refer to the modem user manual for details.
• The connection baud rate may be too great for the selected modem. Go into the connection
window and enter 'AT' ENTER. AT is a modem 'attention' command the modem should
respond with 'OK' if it is operating correctly. This also has the effect of synchronizing
the serial speeds between the BTS Service Software and modem.
• Check that the cable fitted is the correct type for both the modem and the host computer.
Data Errors
• Check that the Modem Settings (especially the serial settings) are correct. The baud rate may be
too high for the host computer (between the host computer and the modem), try a lower speed.
• Check that the Modem handshaking protocols have been set up correctly. If the link
between the BTS Service Software and the modem is operating at a baud rate greater
than the link between the two modems then a handshaking protocol is required to
govern the data flow. Set the handshaking mechanism required in the modem settings
window. The modem must be configured to use the same protocol; the modem user
manual provides details of the steps necessary to achieve this.
Modem Routing Command (Configuration Menu)
Not available for Dimetra 5.5 and newer.

This option, selected via the main menu command Configuration->Modem Routing, sets the BTS Service
Software communications system to the values entered in the Modem and Modem Serial Port area. The
"Connect Command" is only displayed with control buttons that pertain to this mode of operation.
Passwords Command (Configuration Menu)

This screen allows the user to change the password of the access level that is currently
in use. The operation for this is as follows:
• Enter the password for the current access level.
• Press the ENTER key or the OK button.
2-130 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Access Configuration Command (Configuration menu)
• If the password is not entered correctly the edit box is cleared and try again, this is
repeated until a valid entry is made or the Cancel button is pressed.
• Now enter the new password for the current access level, the entry must be between
4 and 10 characters inclusive. If an entry is made outside this range a warning is
reported and the edit box cleared, test can then be re-entered.
• Finally re-enter the new password.
• If this entry matches the previous one a message will be displayed requesting the confirmation
of the password change before continuing, if the entries do not match a warning message is
presented after which the dialog box is terminated with the passwords left unchanged.
Access Configuration Command (Configuration menu)

This dialog box allows the user with level 4 security access to configure the access levels required for
other users of the BTS Service Software. The security access mechanism controls access to the data entry
window parameters and other functions. A full list of the functions and controls that may be controlled
by the security system is displayed in the Access Control Item List. Adjacent to this list are three check
boxes that allow one or more access levels to be set for that controller function.
For example if Base Radio->Factory Password were selected, the check box values would change
to show the current access levels set for this particular control. Modify the check boxes to the
required settings and select the OK button to commit the change.
Modify as many controls and functions as required before selecting the OK button.
Access level four (4) has unconditional access to all controls and functions.
It is possible that an access level could be configured in such a way to allow a user to change
current communications routing but not provide access to the connection window. This does not
have any serious operational implications but being able to select a communications routing and
not be subsequently able to use it may cause the user some confusion.
In a similar manner if the engineer configuring the access levels wishes to make download
of application files permissible then the send files button should also be enabled. These
entries are adjacent in the table to assist the user.
The BTS Service Software has no awareness of the potential conflicts outlined above; it is down
to the engineer to ensure that the parameters are set up correctly.
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-131

Help Menu Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
Help Menu
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The Help Menu contains the following sub-menus:

"Contents Command (Help Menu)"
"Search Command (Help Menu)"
"About Command (Help Menu)"
"Context Help Command"
Contents Command (Help Menu)

Use this command to display the opening screen of Help. From the opening screen, you can jump to
step-by-step instructions for using the BTS Service Software and various types of reference information.
Once you open Help, you can click the Contents button whenever you want to return to the opening screen.
Search Command (Help Menu)

This menu command displays the operating system help - Search dialog box. This dialog provides a
mechanism that allows the BTS Service Software help pages to be searched for specific subjects.
Refer to the Windows documentation for more information concerning the Help - Search dialog box.
About Command (Help Menu)

This menu command displays the Dimetra BTS Service Software Help/About window. This
window displays the BTS Service Software copyright notice and version information. The version
information should be quoted in any correspondence with Motorola.
Shortcuts
Toolbar:
Context Help Command

Use the Context Help command to obtain help on some portion of the BTS Service Software.
When you choose the Toolbar's Context Help button, the mouse pointer changes to an arrow and
question mark. Then click somewhere in the BTS Service Software window, such as another
Toolbar button. The Help topic is shown for the item you clicked.
2-132 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Context Help Command
Shortcuts
Toolbar:
Keys: SHIFT+F1
6802700U57-W October 2010 2-133

Context Help Command Chapter 2: Service Software Operation
2-134 6802700U57-W October 2010

Chapter
3
Informative Reports, Errors and Warnings
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The section below describes Informative Reports, Errors and Warnings.
Personality Screen Messages

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The section below describes Personality Screen Messages.
Site Configuration (Top Level) Messages

It is not recommended to configure the satellite option only for the primary site link.
The primary site link should introduce equal or lower delay than the secondary link.
Confirm Addition of New Base Radio

Please confirm using the Yes or No buttons whether or not you wish to add a new
Base Radio to the site configuration.
Confirm Deletion of Existing Base Radio

Please confirm using the Yes or No buttons whether or not you wish to remove an
existing Base Radio from the site configuration.
6802700U57-W October 2010 3-1

Confirm Deletion of Existing Adjacent Channel Chapter 3: Informative Reports, Errors and Warnings
Confirm Deletion of Existing Adjacent Channel

Please confirm using the Yes or No buttons whether or not you wish to remove an
existing Adjacent Channel from the site configuration.
Confirm Clearing eMTS Installed Checkbox

You are about to uncheck eMTS Installed whereas some BRs uses extended band.
Are you sure you want to proceed?
Confirm Lack of Support for Standby BR on the eTETRA MTS

eTETRA MTS does not support Standby BR. The configuration for Standby BR has been cleared..
Confirm Addition of New Adjacent Channel

Please confirm using the Yes or No buttons whether or not you wish to add a new
Adjacent Channel to the site configuration.
Incorrect Data Value Entered

The value entered is outside the valid range, contains illegal characters or is incorrectly formatted. The
control that contains the invalid entry will be reset to its default value when the message box containing
the error message is dismissed. Refer to the help screen page (by pressing F1 or the Help button) for
this particular data entry window if in doubt about the valid range for this parameter.
This can also happen after an upload followed by a download. That means that the BTS Service
Software has reset the uploaded cipher key to its default value following a configuration
upload from a site to prevent copying of keys. In this case a key needs to be entered to
make a valid site configuration otherwise the BTS Service Software displays an "Incorrect
Cipher ..." warning after pressing the OK button in the Serving Cell site. The warning
was as a result of a configuration upload but the BTS Service Software does not know
whether this is the case since it has no internal memory for this purpose.
Disclaimer Message Size

Maximum size of disclaimer message text has been reached.
3-2 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Channel Number Error
Channel Number Error

Entries into the DLCI table must be in multiples of four and must also be contiguous. For example if a
configuration contains 2 Base Radios the DLCI table should contain entries for the first 8 channels.
Reset Site Data

This control (present on the Site Configuration window) resets the entire site configuration data. A warning mes-
sage is displayed to allow the user to confirm whether to continue with the operation (which is not reversible).
Use of this control returns all the personality-related data to their

default values; it should be used with caution.
Site Description Error or Site Version Error

The edit boxes provided for entry of the Site Title and Version are restricted to 100 and 10 characters
respectively. If either of these is exceeded a warning is displayed for the user. When the warning message is
dismissed, input focus is returned to the edit control that exceeded the input limit for the user to change the entry.
Ethernet Site Link Messages

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
While configuring Ethernet Site Link two kinds of faults can appear:
• Error: This fault indicates that configuration is not valid and cannot be saved. Errors
shall be displayed in Error message box. Information concerning the reason of an
error is displayed along with instructions on how to handle it.
• Warning: This fault indicates that parameter corresponding with the warning is assigned
non-standard value, which might lead to non-optimal or unexpected behavior of the MTS.
However, none-standard settings can be useful for some exceptional configuration. User is
allowed to apply such settings by pressing YES button in the Warning message box. User
can also drop the change by pressing NO button in the Warning message box.
Errors and warnings can appear on two levels:
6802700U57-W October 2010 3-3

Ethernet Site Link Tab Chapter 3: Informative Reports, Errors and Warnings
• When pressing OK button on child dialog of the Ethernet Site Link tab. In such case
configuration performed in appropriate dialog is not accepted until user corrects all Errors.
• When pressing OK button on the Ethernet Site Link tab. In this case configuration performed
in all dialogs must be positively validated before it can be saved. If the validation is not
successful and configuration cannot be saved, the user is informed about error that must be
corrected. On this level user shall be informed about errors that could not be discovered when
validating configuration from single child dialog. For example when user configures CBS
in QOS Parameters dialog to be lower than fragmentation size in Network Parameters
dialog, then an error message appears after pressing OK button on the Ethernet Site Link
tab. When pressing OK button on the Ethernet Site Link tab, the user is informed once again
about ignoring any warning(s)during configuration in Ethernet Site Link (by pressing YES
button on the warning message box). In such case a warning exclamation mark is visible
opposite to Edit button of any child dialog for which warning(s) has been ignored.
Ethernet Site Link Tab

• Please, make sure that IP Fragmentation Size configured in Network Pa-
rameters dialog is lower than <value>.
• EBS cannot be lower than Primary Tunnel Fragmentation Size plus size
of Ethernet headers (42 bytes).
• CBS cannot be lower than Primary Tunnel Fragmentation Size plus size
of Ethernet headers (42 bytes).
• PVC1 interface IP address should not be in Primary WAN interface's IP
network. Are you sure you want to proceed?
• Ethernet Site Link Configuration contains non-standard settings which might result in
incorrect operation of Base Station. Are you sure you want to proceed?
• Ethernet Site Link Configuration contains incorrect settings.
Ethernet Site Link Tab - Network Parameters
• Primary WAN Interface Address cannot be 0.0.0.0.

• Incorrect Primary WAN IP Netmask.
• Primary WAN Interface Gateway does not fit in primary WAN Interface Network.
• Primary WAN VLAN ID should be in the range of 1 - 4095
• Primary VLAN Tagging should not be OFF if primary WAN Gateway is
0.0.0.0. Are you sure you want to proceed?
• Primary VLAN Tagging should not be ON if primary WAN Gateway is not
0.0.0.0. Are you sure you want to proceed?
• Primary IP Tunnel Remote Address cannot be 0.0.0.0.
• Local IP address (primary WAN interface IP address) for Primary IP tunnel must be
in the same IP subnet as corresponding Remote IP address.
3-4 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Ethernet Site Link Tab - Network Parameters
• IP address of Primary WAN Interface,IP address of Primary Gateway and Remote

IP address of Primary IP tunnel must be unique.
• Please, make sure that CBS and EBS (if used) configured in QOS Parme-
ters dialog are grater than <value>.
• Secondary WAN IP address shall be set when interface is enabled.
• Incorrect Secondary WAN IP Netmask.
• WAN interface address mask shall be set for secondary WAN interface.
• Secondary IP Tunnel should be enabled when secondary WAN interface is enabled.
• VLAN tagging options should be equal for both WAN interfaces.
• Both WAN interfaces shall have same layer 2/3 setting. Add or remove gateway address.
• Secondary tunnel remote IP address cannot be equal to secondary WAN interface IP address.
• WAN Addresses shall be unique for each WAN interface.
• Secondary VLAN Tagging should not be set to OFF if primary WAN Gateway is 0.0.0.0.
• Secondary VLAN Tagging should not be set to ON if primary WAN Gateway is not 0.0.0.0.
• Secondary WAN interface address shall be different from secondary gateway.
• Secondary IP tunnel remote address shall be different from secondary gateway.
• Secondary WAN interface gateway does not fit in secondary WAN interface network.
• Secondary tunnel remote address does not fit in secondary WAN interface network.
• For 2 tunnels on primary WAN interface only layer 3 link is supported.
Primary gateway address should be set.
• Secondary WAN IP address shall not be set while interface is disabled.
• Secondary WAN gateway shall not be set while interface disabled.
• Secondary tunnel remote address does not fit in primary WAN interface network.
• Secondary WAN interface is disabled, but secondary WAN mask is set.
• Secondary WAN interface is disabled, but secondary VLAN ID is set.
• Secondary IP tunnel remote address must be set if secondary IP tunnel is enabled.
• Secondary IP tunnel remote address is set but secondary IP tunnel is disabled.
• Tunnel 2 receive voice option should be OFF when secondary tunnel is disabled.
• Remote IP Addresses should be unique for each Tunnel.
• Secondary WAN VLAN ID should be in the range of 1 - 4095.
• VLAN IDs shall be unique for WAN interfaces.
6802700U57-W October 2010 3-5

Ethernet Site Link Tab - QOS Parameters Chapter 3: Informative Reports, Errors and Warnings
Ethernet Site Link Tab - QOS Parameters

• Yellow Color Map cannot be empty if EBS is set to a value other than 0.
• Yellow Color Map should be empty if EBS set to 0 value.
• EIR cannot be 0 when EBS is set to a value other than 0.
• EBS cannot be 0 when EIR is set to a value other than 0.
Site Controller - Ethernet Site Link Local Gateway Parameters

• BTS IP address for 2nd MSO shall be set.
• BTS IP mask for 2nd MSO shall be set.
• Primary/Secondary tunnel remote address for 2nd MSO cannot be equal to
Primary/Secondary WAN interface address.
• Primary/Secondary IP tunnel remote address for 2nd MSO must be set.
• Tunnel remote addresses for 2nd MSO shall be different.
• Primary/Secondary IP tunnel remote address for 2nd MSO is set but Primary/Sec-
ondary IP tunnel for 2nd MSO is disabled.
• Primary/Secondary IP tunnel remote address for 2nd MSO shall be different from
Primary/Secondary gateway for 2nd MSO LG PVC1 interface IP address cannot
be in LG PVC2 interface’s IP network for 2nd MSO.
• Primary PVC BTS IP address for 2nd MSO shall be set.
• Primary PVC IP mask for 2nd MSO shall be set.
• PVC1 CR IP address shall fit in PVC1 network for 2nd MSO.
• PVC1 CR IP address shall be different from PVC1 BTS IP address for 2nd MSO.
• Secondary PVC BTS IP address for 2nd MSO shall be set.
• Secondary PVC IP mask for 2nd MSO shall be set.
• PVC2 CR IP address shall fit in PVC2 network for 2nd MSO.
• PVC2 CR IP address shall be different from PVC2 BTS IP address for 2nd MSO.
• PVC IP Addresses shall be unique for each PVC interface for 2nd MSO. Both PVC CR
IP addresses should be set to 0 or both different than 0 for 2nd MSO.
• Primary/Secondary tunnel remote address for 2nd MSO cannot be equal to
Primary/Secondary WAN interface address.
• Primary/Secondary IP tunnel remote address for 2nd MSO shall be different from
main Primary/Secondary tunnel’s remote address.
• Primary/Secondary IP tunnel remote address for 2nd MSO shall be different
from main secondary tunnel’s remote address.
• Primary/Secondary IP tunnel remote address for 2nd MSO shall be different
from Primary/Secondary gateway.
• Primary/Secondary tunnel remote address for 2nd MSO does not fit in Pri-
mary/Secondary WAN interface network.
3-6 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Site Link Tab
• Primary/Secondary WAN interface address shall be different from Pri-

mary/Secondary gateway for 2nd MSO.
• Primary/Secondary IP tunnel remote address shall be different from Pri-
mary/Secondary gateway for 2nd MSO.
• Primary/Secondary WAN interface gateway for 2nd MSO does not fit in
Primary/Secondary WAN interface network.
• BTS Site ID for Primary MSO should be in the range: 1-95 when Local Gateway
is enabled. Are you sure you want to proceed?
Site Link Tab

• IP address shall be set for PVC1 interface. Are you sure you want to proceed?
• IP address shall be set for PVC2 interface. Are you sure you want to proceed?
• IP mask shall be set for PVC1 interface. Are you sure you want to proceed?
• IP mask shall be set for PVC2 interface. Are you sure you want to proceed?
• PVC Addresses shall be unique for each PVC interface. Are you sure you want to proceed?
• PVC1 interface IP address should not be in PVC2 interface's IP network.
Are you sure you want to proceed?
• Primary PVC BTS IP Address should be in the same network as Pri-
mary PVC Core Router Address.
• Secondary PVC BTS IP Address should be in the same network as Sec-
ondary PVC Core Router Address.
• Primary PVC BTS IP Address shouldn't be the same as Primary PVC Core Router IP Address.
• Secondary PVC BTS IP Address shouldn't be the same as Secondary
PVC Core Router IP Address.
• When BFD is enabled then both PVC Core Router addresses on the Site Link tab should be set.
General File Access Messages

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The following section describes the General File Access Messages.
6802700U57-W October 2010 3-7

Configuration Version Not Accepted Chapter 3: Informative Reports, Errors and Warnings
Configuration Version Not Accepted

An attempt was made to open a configuration file that is created by an earlier version of the BTS
Service Software that is no longer compatible. The data has to be re-entered.
Configuration File Version Not Current

The configuration file selected was created by an earlier version of the BTS Service Software.
This file can be read by this version but some data may not be present and is set to default.
See the release notes for details of changes made to this version.
Data File Read Error

An error was detected in the decoding process. The file being decoded may have been corrupted on
transfer to/from the Site Controller, on the Site Controller or within the PC. The following messages
may be displayed as a result of the decoder’s verification and validation processes:
• Illegal Base Radio index found.
• Input file format error.
• File name does not match that expected.
• Unrecognizable or non-supported type code.
If this problem persists please contact your Motorola Service Center.
Opening a .cf File

The user is not permitted to open a .cf file. When a configuration is uploaded from the Site Controller
the decoder operates on a complete set of .cf files not an individual file. Information regarding only
the Site Controller or a single Base Radio can be viewed by opening an .sc1 or b0? file accordingly.
The BTS Service Software is able to decode these files singularly with no ambiguities.
Save Changes
You are about to perform an operation that results in the current personality being lost.
This has been modified since it was last saved.
The user has the option to:
• "Save Command (File Menu)" under the current filename
• "Save As Command (File Menu)" a new file
3-8 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Read Only Files
• Cancel, which proceeds without saving.
A configuration may not be downloaded until the currently loaded

personality is saved, or a new personality is loaded.
Read Only Files

You have attempted to save a file that is only available for reading. To save the contents of the
personality to disk the file must be renamed using "Save As Command (File Menu)"
Saving Previously Generated Files

This warning is generated when the user attempts to save a personality created from a *.sc1 or *.b0?
file. These files are originally created by the Generate command. When an existing *.sc1 or *.b0?
file is read and decoded into the BTS Service Software only certain data can be recreated. Any
remaining information is set to default values as only one file can be read and decoded at on one
time. It is therefore impossible to construct a site solely from compiled data.
For example if the file test.b03 was opened it is effectively converted to Base Radio 1. Other data
held within the file that reference Base Radios 1 and 2 would be lost. In addition, the Site Controller
data only consists of default values. If then a new configuration file were created by using File->Save
or Save As then it would not contain the data intended. A subsequent compilation and transmission
of the compiled data to the Site Controller may result in unpredictable results.
The warning is to alert the user to this fact if the OK button is pressed then the file operation proceeds as usual.
It is recommended that generated files are opened for reading only.
Unrecognized Data
No recognizable data was found in the file selected - no action was taken.
Meaning: The file selected for reading and decoding did not contain data that the BTS Service
Software could recognize. Either the wrong type of file was selected or the file has been
corrupted in some way. This problem can occur if a file was opened that has an extension that
is allowed but is not a file produced by the BTS Service Software.
6802700U57-W October 2010 3-9

Unrecognized File Chapter 3: Informative Reports, Errors and Warnings
Unrecognized File
You have tried to open a file with a .cfg extension that was not recognized by the BTS Service
Software. The file may be corrupt or incorrectly named.
Unrecognized File Type

The BTS Service Software could not recognize the file that has been selected to be
opened. It is either corrupt or incorrectly named.
Configuration Not Saved

The current configuration has not been saved to disk. The user may proceed from this prompt,
but they will not be able to download a configuration until the current configuration has been
saved or another configuration is loaded into memory.
Communication Messages
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The following section describes the Communication Messages.
Discard Changes
The Dialing Directory has been modified. These modifications are lost if Yes is selected. To keep the
modifications, select No and exit the Dialing Directory window using the OK button.
Modem Initialization Error

The modem failed to initialize. Please ensure that it is switched on and connected to the serial port selected.
If the modem is switched on and connected to the serial port the following points may be of assistance:
• The modem may currently be connected, this is unlikely but could have happened if the
modem is dialed by another modem. To force the modem to drop any current connection,
exit the Dialing Directory window and close the Connection Window.
3-10 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Modem Dialing Error
• Ensure that any initialization string entered does not contain an AT command. The string is
automatically prefixed and the inclusion of a second AT results in the modem failing to dial.
• Ensure that the baud rate between the BTS Service Software and the modem is
not greater than the modem or serial port can support.
Modem Dialing Error

The remote end failed to answer the call. Please ensure that the number dialed was correct or try again later.
If the number dialed is correct and the remote modem is not busy the following points may be of use.
• It is necessary to set the modem connected to the Site Controller to auto answer. Please speak
to someone at the remote end to ensure this is the case. Issues relating to the remote modem
configuration are documented in EBTS PR3.0 Installation, Configuration & Basic Service
Manual (EBTS), MBTS 1.0 Installation, Configuration & Basic Service Manual (MBTS).
Modem Connection Error

The Modem failed to connect to the remote end.
Possible reasons include:
• The line was busy.
• The remote end failed to answer.
In either case ensure that the number dialed was correct and/or try again later.
Serial Port Not Detected

When the BTS Service Software can not locate a free serial port on the host machine, close an application
that is using one of the serial ports and retry the command/re-start the BTS Service Software.
Too Many Characters in Name

The maximum number of characters allocated for the storage of the Site Name and Number is 75
characters. This imposes a restriction on the number of characters that may be entered into the name
box of 75 - length of the phone number. A check is performed when the Add or Replace buttons are
pressed. A warning is displayed for the user if this criterion is exceeded.
6802700U57-W October 2010 3-11

Unable to Configure Serial Port Chapter 3: Informative Reports, Errors and Warnings
Unable to Configure Serial Port

The BTS Service Software could not initialize the selected serial port. This may be caused by the user
attempting to use a port not currently available. Change the port selector on the Direct Settings or
Modem Settings window depending upon the current mode of connection.
Alternatively, this may be a hardware or system error. The PC user manual should
be consulted for possible causes.
Undetermined Modem Error

The modem responded with an error that was not recognized. Ensure that the modem initialization settings
are correct and if possible try to determine if the modem is operating correctly by alternative means.
VT100 Logging Errors

When logging VT100 output into a log file the BTS Service Software performs a number of checks
to ensure the file handling is carried out successfully. Errors that occur are presented to the user as
warnings messages. The following is an explanation of the errors that may occur:
File Open Errors - Errors that have prevented the file from being opened:
Permission denied! Please check that the file "filename" is not already open by another application. - If the log
file is currently opened by another application this warning will be displayed. Dismiss the message box and
check all other applications currently running to find the one that has the file open. After closing the file in the
other application press Log to File and select the file as before. It should be opened without error this time.
The path "pathname" is not valid and the file could not be opened. - The user has entered an invalid path into
the file name edit control on the Log File Selection window. Dismiss the message box and press Log to File. If
you are unsure of the correct path use the Drives and Directories selectors to navigate to the desired location.
The application has failed to open the file "filename". - The BTS Service Software has failed to open
the file and the error returned does not fall into either of the above categories. If the failure occurred
attempting to open an existing file then try opening the file using an alternative application, such as
Notepad. If this is unsuccessful please consult your PC user's manual. If the file can be opened by
another application and not by the BTS Service Software you may want to consult your local Motorola
Service Center. If the error has been thrown in an attempt to create a new file check the available disk
space. If sufficient space is available a PC user manual should be consulted.
File Write Errors - Errors that have occurred whilst writing data to the file:
Disk full! Logging to file "filename" has been terminated. - The data has failed to be written to disk due to a
disk full condition. Free up space on the destination drive of choose a different drive for the log file.
A write error has occurred. Logging to file "filename" has been terminated. - An error has occurred whilst
attempting to write data into the file that cannot be attributed to a disk full condition.
3-12 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide File Download Type
File Download Type

This window appears when the user selects Send Files. The user is prompted to
select from the following options.
• Send Configuration: The user is prompted to select a configuration file (.cfg) for download
• Send Application Files: The user is prompted to select application files (.txc, .brc, .x21) for download
• Cancel: Transmit operation is canceled
Data Generation and Decoding Messages

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The following section describes the Data Generation and Decoding Messages.
Configuration File Compilation Failed

An error was detected during the configuration file compilation phase; this prevented
the output file(s) from being created correctly.
Possible causes are:
• Output file already exists and is write protected.
• Output file cannot be written because of a computer error.
• The file system is damaged.
• Out of disk space.
If this situation persists please contact your local Motorola Service Center.
The warning "The BER compilation phase failed. Invalid Cipher Key - Encrypted
Static Cipher Key" means that the BTS Service Software has reset the uploaded
cipher key to its default value following a configuration upload from a site
to prevent copying of keys. A key needs to be entered to make a valid site
configuration otherwise the BTS Service Software displays an "Incorrect Cipher..."
warning after pressing the OK button in the Serving Cell site. The warning was as
a result of a configuration upload but the BTS Service Software does not know
whether this is the case since it has no internal memory for this purpose
6802700U57-W October 2010 3-13

Duplicate Cabinet ID Position Chapter 3: Informative Reports, Errors and Warnings
Duplicate Cabinet ID Position

More than one BR has been configured with the same combination of cabinet and position. All BRs must be
configured with a unique combination of cabinet and position. If BRs are configured with the same cabinet /
position then one or more BRs will fail to operate and this may cause the site to fail completely.
Decoding Configuration Data Files

The following points apply to the decoding of configuration files either as a result of a configuration
upload from the Site Controller or if a user has opened a generated *.b0? or *.sc1 file.
When uploading a configuration from the Site Controller there must always be at least one tsc.cf
file and one brc0?.cf file present in the memory of the Site Controller.
Messages that may be displayed whilst decoding files:
• No Site Controller file (tsc.cf) was uploaded from the Site Controller. File
data decoding cannot continue.
Meaning: Although the configuration files were successfully uploaded from the Site
Controller, the tsc.cf file was not received. This file is required so that the number of Base
Radios present in the Site Controller can be calculated. Use the Site Controller MMI 'DIR'
command to establish the existence of the file on the Site Controller.
• The number of BR files required by the Site Controller file is greater than the
number actually uploaded from the Site Controller. All data read during the
Site Controller decoding phase will be discarded.
Meaning: The Site Controller file decoded specifies the number of Base Radios present
in this site. The actual number of Base Radio files uploaded from the Site Controller was
less than this number. Therefore the site cannot be reproduced. Use the Site Controller
MMI 'DIR' command to establish the existence of the file on the Site Controller.
• An error occurred during file upload. The auto decoding process will not be carried out.
Meaning: The upload process has been terminated because of a communications
failure with the Site Controller. In order to read and decode an entire site the
communications process must complete successfully.
• Out of the x Base Radio file(s) uploaded only the first y file(s) are included in the
current configuration. These files were decoded successfully.
Meaning: If a configuration has been downloaded to the Site Controller that contains 4 Base
Radio files but it has overwritten a configuration that contained more than 4 Base Radio files
then Base Radio files not relevant to the current configuration will still be stored in the memory
of the Site Controller. When a configuration upload is requested all the configuration files in the
Site Controller will be uploaded to the BTS Service Software. The BTS Service Software only
knows how many Base Radio files are required for the current configuration after decoding the
tsc.cf file. If files have been uploaded that are not included in the configuration then the above
message is displayed to inform the user. The configuration will still be successfully decoded.
• The sequence of uploaded BR files is inconsistent with the Site Controller file.
Meaning: After decoding the tsc.cf file the BTS Service Software has examined the
list of uploaded Base Radio files and discovered there is not a numerically contiguous
sequence of Base Radio files for the range extracted from the tsc.cf file.
• Site Controller data file successfully read.
Meaning: The user has opened a *.sc1 file, this file has been successfully
decoded and the data loaded into the personality.
3-14 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Carrier Number Value
• Base Radio - x successfully read.

Meaning: The user has opened a *.b0? file, this file has been successfully
decoded and the data loaded into the personality.
• MTS 4configuration has been successfully imported to the <current_site_type> personality.
Meaning: The user has opened a configuration created for different type
of BTS than presently selected.
• BRs number for selected BTS type exceeds the maximum
Meaning: The user has opened a configuration file with a number of BRs
greater than maximum for selected type of BTS.
Carrier Number Value

385.575 MHz and 419.175 MHz receiver frequencies produce a self-quieting effect in the
MTS base radios. Please change the Carrier Number value.
Path Delay Threshold Parameter out of Range

Path Delay Threshold parameter is out of range. It has been truncated to the maximum valid value.
GPS Signal Lost Timer invalid value

Infinite value of GPS Signal Lost Timer is not available in the currently selected release mode.
The parameter has been set back to the default.
Serial Communications Error

An error was detected during the operation of the serial communications system. Possible causes are:
• Noise on the communications lines.
• Interruption of the communications link.
• An internal system error.
All cables and connections should be checked before further communications attempts are made.
Unrecognized Object IDs

A list of configuration file object IDs that could not be recognized during the decoding phase is displayed..
Each parameter within the data file has a unique location code. The unresolved OIDs and their values are
stored in the .cfg files and exported (.sc1 files). This is most likely to occur if there is a mismatch in the
versions of the Site Controller and the BTS Service Software. It is possible for the Site Controller to
6802700U57-W October 2010 3-15

General Application Messages Chapter 3: Informative Reports, Errors and Warnings
have been programmed by a later version of the BTS Service Software. In this case additional parameters
may have been added that are not known to the BTS Service Software. However, if an older version of
the BTS Service Software is being used then these parameters would not be present.
The message appears only if the Configuration, Options, Notify of unrec-

ognized MIB parameters option is set.
General Application Messages

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The following sections describe different messages that pertain to the application itself.
Fatal Errors
BTS Service Software Fatal Errors are generated mainly due to system errors such as the inability to
create a file or to execute a Windows command. In these circumstances the BTS Service Software
cannot proceed with its current task without producing unpredictable results.
Record the error message as displayed on the dialog box from which this help page was invoked
together with any relevant information, such as what action(s) were being executed at the time. Contact
your local Motorola Service Center for assistance if the problem persists.
Information about the error is written to the error log file called cfgerr.log located in the
directory where the BTS Service Software was installed. Your local Motorola Service Center
may request diagnostic information contained within this file.
The BTS Service Software is always automatically shut down after a fatal error is detected, this may cause a
Windows General Protection Fault, it is therefore advised to re-boot the machine after any such error occurs.
Internal Application Configuration Reset

When the BTS Service Software is superseded by a later version it automatically overwrites its
private configuration file with a new version. This is done to ensure that any changes made to
the tool are correctly registered. Unfortunately this action resets the serial port configuration
selections and the passwords to default settings. This message is intended to inform the user of
this fact so that the previous settings may be correctly reinstated.
3-16 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Password Confirmation
Password Confirmation
The two passwords entered do not match so the original password is not changed.
Title Bar
The title bar is located along the top of a window. It contains the name of the application
and document. To move the window, drag the title bar.
You can also move dialog boxes by dragging their title bars.
A title bar may contain the following elements: Application Control-menu button Maximize button
• Name of the application
• Name of the document
• Restore button
Scroll Bars
Displayed at the right and bottom edges of the document window. The scroll boxes inside
the scroll bars indicate your vertical and horizontal location in the document. You can use
the mouse to scroll to other parts of the document.
Size Command (System Menu)

Use this command to display a four-headed arrow so you can size the active window with the arrow keys.
After the pointer changes to the four-headed arrow:

1. Press one of the DIRECTION keys (left, right, up, or down arrow key) to move
the pointer to the border you want to move.
2. Press a DIRECTION key to move the border.
3. Press ENTER when the window is the size you want.
This command is unavailable if you maximize the window.

This command is unavailable if the BTS Service Software is in Communications Mode.
6802700U57-W October 2010 3-17

Maximize Command (System Menu) Chapter 3: Informative Reports, Errors and Warnings
Shortcuts
Mouse: Drag the size bars at the corners or edges of the window.
Move command (System menu)
Use this command to display a four-headed arrow so you can move the active win-
dow or dialog box with the arrow keys.
This command is unavailable if you maximize the window.

Shortcuts
Keys: CTRL+F7
Minimize command (System menu)
Use this command to reduce the BTS Service Software window to an icon.
Shortcuts
Mouse: Click the minimize icon on the title bar.
Keys: ALT+F9
Maximize Command (System Menu)

Use this command to enlarge the active window to fill the available space.
This command is unavailable if the BTS Service Software is in Communications Mode.

Shortcuts
Mouse: Click the maximize icon on the title bar; or double-click the title bar.
Keys: CTRL+F10 enlarges a document window.
3-18 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Close Command (System Menu)
Close Command (System Menu)

Use this command to close the active window or dialog box.
Clicking on this button is the same as choosing the "Exit Command (File Menu)".
Shortcuts
Keys: ALT+F4
Restore Command (System Menu)

Use this command to return the active window to its size and position before you
chose the Maximize or Minimize command.
Switch to Command (System Menu)

Use this command to display a list of all open applications. Use this "Task List" to
switch to or close an application on the list.
Shortcuts
Keys: CTRL+ESC
Dialog Box Options
When you choose the Switch To command, you are presented with a dialog box with the following options:
Task List
Select the application you want to switch to or close.
Switch To
Makes the selected application active.
End Task
Closes the selected application.
Cancel
Closes the Task List box.
Cascade
Arranges open applications so they overlap and you can see each title bar. This option
does not affect applications reduced to icons.
6802700U57-W October 2010 3-19

System Unstable Chapter 3: Informative Reports, Errors and Warnings
Tile
Arranges open applications into windows that do not overlap. This option does not
affect applications reduced to icons.
Arrange Icons
Arranges the icons of all minimized applications across the bottom of the screen.
System Unstable
The system has encountered a fatal internal error. The error log could not be written to because
the system has prevented it. Reboot the machine to ensure that the system is in a stable state
to continue. The program terminates when the OK is pressed.
Path Delay Threshold

For proper system operation only Air to Ground Stations with the appropriate setting of Subscriber
Class corresponding to Air to Ground compliant subscribers should be configured with Path Delay
Threshold higher than 58.1 km. Are you sure you want to use this setting?
TETRA Group ID Error

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The TETRA Group ID Min parameter is greater than the TETRA Group ID Max parameter. Please correct the
value in error. The error checking is performed when OK button on the Site Controller sheet is pressed.
TETRA Individual ID Error

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The TETRA Individual ID Min parameter is greater than the TETRA Individual ID Max
parameter. Please correct the value in error. The error checking is performed when
OK button on the Site Controller sheet is pressed.
3-20 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Duplicate Carrier Number
Duplicate Carrier Number

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
At least two BRs have been configured with the same Carrier Number. All BRs should be configured
with a unique Carrier Number to facilitate the visualization of the values.
Duplicate Main Carrier Number

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
At least two BRs have been configured with the same Main Carrier Number. All BRs should be configured
with a unique Main Carrier Number to facilitate the visualization of the values.
Duplicate DLCI Entries

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
At least one entry of the DLCI table is duplicate. All entries in the DLCI table should
be unique to facilitate the visualization of the values.
Invalid Deleted Adjacent Site

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The ID of a deleted Adjacent Site is set to 0xFF (255), but this Site entry cannot be removed
from the config and hence the implementation of 0xFF, so instead of displaying it incorrectly,
this table entry is interpreted as deleted/invalid site and it is ignored.
6802700U57-W October 2010 3-21

Configuration Not Sent Chapter 3: Informative Reports, Errors and Warnings
Configuration Not Sent

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The current configuration has not been saved to disk. The user may not proceed with a configuration
file download at this prompt. They will not be able to download a configuration until the current
configuration has been saved or another configuration is loaded into memory.
Ethernet Site Parameters Not Set

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Ethernet Site Link does not work until parameters in the following dialog(s) on the Ethernet Site Link
tab are not configured: Network Parameters. Are you sure you want to proceed?
Extended TX Base Frequency Out Of Range

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Extended TX Base Frequency <current_value> MHz does not conform to TETRA Standard.
According to the current ETSI Specification TS 100 392-15 V1.3.1 it should be <suggested_value>
MHz. You can change this setting on the Serving Cell - Carrier Tab.
3-22 6802700U57-W October 2010

Chapter
4
Windows Reference
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The following section describes the Windows Reference dialog boxes.
Create Personality Dialog Box

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The Service Software provides multi-release support, so configurations for different Motorola Dimetra
BTS Types and System Releases can be created and edited within the same BTS Service Software
application. Currently supported Dimetra/BTS versions are MTS4/MTS2/MTS1/EBTS/MBTS R7.2,
R7.2 Non Standard, R7.1, R7.1 Non Standard,R7.0, R7.0 Non Standard, R6.2, R6.2 Non Standard,
R6.1, R6.1 Non Standard, R6.0,R6.0 Non Standard, R5.5, R5.5 Non Standard, R5.5 SCO, R5.2, R5.2
Non Standard, R5.2 SCO, R5.1, R5.1 Non Standard, R5.1 SCO, R5.0 and R3.7/R3.8.
Specify the type of personality you wish to create:
• Dimetra R7.2
• Dimetra R7.1
• Dimetra R7.0
• Dimetra R6.2
• Dimetra R6.1
• Dimetra R6.0
• Dimetra R5.5
6802700U57-W October 2010 4-1

File Open Dialog Box Chapter 4: Windows Reference
• Dimetra R5.2
• Dimetra R5.1
• Dimetra R5.0
• Dimetra R3.7/R3.8
If no personality has been chosen yet (Mode: Undefined), the suggested personality
type to create is "EBTS Dimetra R7.0".
Once a personality has been selected, the BTS Service Software always indicates the current
mode to the user by printing "Mode: EBTS", "Mode: MBTS", "Mode: MTS 2" or "Mode:
MTS 4" followed by release number in the Status Bar.
Depending on the configuration chosen, some items under the Connection menu are
inactive. For example, when MTS mode or Dimetra R6.1 or higher has been chosen
in TESS, the Connect Modem option is unavailable.
File Open Dialog Box

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The following options allow you to specify which file to open:

File Name
Type or select the filename you want to open. This box lists files with the extension
you select in the List Files of Type box.
List Files of Type
Select the type of file you want to open.
Drives
Select the drive, in which the BTS Service Software stores the file that you want to open.
Directories
Select the directory in which the BTS Service Software stores the file that you want to open.
4-2 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide File Save As Dialog Box
Network...
Choose this button to connect to a network location, assigning it a new drive letter.
File Save As Dialog Box

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The following options allow to specify the name and location of the file to be saved:
File Name
Type a new filename to save a document with a different name. The BTS Service Software
adds the extension you specify in the Save File As Type box.
Drives
Select the drive in which you want to store the document.
Directories
Select the directory in which you want to store the document.
Network...
Choose this button to connect to a network location, assigning it a new drive letter.
Files and Directories

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The BTS Service Software makes use of the PC hard disk memory to store configuration files, application
files, and uploaded files. It is suggested that the user creates a directory structure (using Windows
Explorer or a similar tool) to aid the ease of location of files. By default the BTS Service Software
reads and writes all data to the directory where the tool was installed (for example, C:\Program
Files\TESS). This includes uploaded configuration and diagnostic files. This directory will also be
used for generated files unless the user performs a File->Save, File->Save As or File->Open operation.
Performing a save prior to a generation operation is recommended to ensure that the generated files
are always placed in the same directory as the configuration (*.cfg) file. This should assist the user
on locating generated files when ready to download them to a Site Controller.
6802700U57-W October 2010 4-3

Print Dialog Box Chapter 4: Windows Reference
Print Dialog Box

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The following options allow you to specify how the document should be printed:
Printer
This is the active printer and printer connection. Choose the Name selector to change the printer and printer
connection. Use Print Setup command to connect to a network printer and or change printing preferences.
You install new printers and configure ports using the Windows Control Panel.
Properties…
Displays a dialog box where you can make additional choices about printing, specific
to the type of printer you have selected.
Print Range Specify the pages you want to print:
All Prints the entire document.
Pages Prints the range of pages you specify in the From and To boxes.
Selection Prints the currently selected text.
Copies
Specify the number of copies you want to print for the above page range.
Collate
Prints copies in page number order, instead of separated multiple copies of each page.
Print Progress Dialog

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The Printing dialog box is shown while the BTS Service Software is sending output to the
printer. The page number indicates the progress of the printing.
To abort printing, choose Cancel.
4-4 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Print Preview Toolbar
Print Preview Toolbar

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The print preview toolbar offers you the following options:

Print
Bring up the print dialog box, to start a print job.
Next Page
Preview the next printed page.
Prev Page
Preview the previous printed page.
One Page / Two Page
Preview one or two printed pages at a time.
Zoom In
Take a closer look at the printed page.
Zoom Out
Take a larger look at the printed page.
Close
Return from print preview to the editing window.
Print Setup Dialog Box

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The following options allow you to select the destination printer and its connection.
Printer
Select the printer you want to use. Select one of the currently installed printers shown in the Name
drop-down list. You install new printers and configure ports using the Windows Control Panel.
Properties…
Displays a dialog box where you can make additional choices about printing, specific
to the type of printer you have selected.
6802700U57-W October 2010 4-5

Options Command (Configuration Menu) Chapter 4: Windows Reference
Paper Size
Select the size of paper that the document is to be printed on.
Paper Source
Some printers offer multiple trays for different paper sources. Specify the tray here.
Orientation
Choose Portrait or Landscape.
Network...
Choose this button to connect to a network printer.
Options Command (Configuration Menu)

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
This command allows the user to change the application settings.
General Settings (Options screen)

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
This screen allows the user to change the general application settings.
Activate the Use the following initial directory checkbox, if you want the BTS Service Software to
start all input file selections (‘Open File’ dialog boxes) in an initial directory of your choice. If this
option is activated, you can select the initial directory via the <Change…> button.
The Maximum number of the history lines sets line numbers over the regular size of the main area of the
communication window and acts as a VT100 terminal. The range for the control is 0 – 500 lines.
The Number of visited sites remembered sets the maximum menu item number which can
contain the menu under the Connect Telnet From Personality menu. This item will be added
after successful connection to the telnet server on TSC or others.
Notify of unrecognized MIB parameters determines whether you are informed about unrecognized
MIB parameters by an appearance of ‘Unrecognized Object IDs’ window
4-6 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide File Transfer Settings (Options screen)
File Transfer Settings (Options screen)

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
This window allows the user to change the advanced file download settings via the Synchronization
with receiver (ms) option. Valid input values are from 0 milliseconds to 1000 milliseconds.
The “Notify of unrecognized MIB parameters” options defines whether the notification about unrecognized
MIB is displayed. The unrecognized parameters are saved, uploaded, and downloaded regardless of this choice.
Best file transfer results are achieved with the default value. Normally you do not need to change
these settings. The default value is dependent on the currently selected baud rate in Serial Port
Settings. Use the <Default> button to reset the value back to its recommended default.
System Manager Password Screen (Level 4)

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
This screen, which is only available to a system manager, allows the user to change the passwords of any of
the user levels. The four, mutually exclusive, buttons at the top of the dialog box select the access level for
which the password is to be changed. These can be set at any time but the setting upon the conclusion of the
procedure is the level to which the new password is assigned. The operation for this is as follows:
• Enter the new password, the entry must be between 4 and 10 characters inclusive. If an entry is
made outside this range a warning is reported and the edit box cleared so the user may try again.
• Re-enter the new password.
• If this entry matches the previous one then the user will be prompted to confirm the password
change proceeding, if the entries do not match the user is presented with a warning after
which the dialog box is terminated with the passwords left unchanged.
6802700U57-W October 2010 4-7

TSC File Selection Chapter 4: Windows Reference
TSC File Selection

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The TSC file selection dialog box allows the user to select a file from a list of related files on the TSC. This box is
used in configuration upload to select the configuration file set (tsc.cf, br0?.rc) to be uploaded. In configuration
file download, the tsc.cf selected and the BR files with matching version labels on the Site Controller will be
overwritten. In application file download file, the file selected will be overwritten on the Site Controller.
If the user presses the OK button, the selected (highlighted) file, or matching file set are
uploaded or replaced, depending on the operation taking place.
If the user presses the Cancel button, the upload or download process is ceased.
See:
"Upload Configuration (Connection Menu)"
"Send Files (Connection Menu)"
"Setting TSC File Versions"
Setting TSC File Versions

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The File download properties dialog box allows the user to set the version label, "use next" and "fallback"
state of the files or in the case of configuration download, file sets, to be downloaded.
• Version label - Label attached to each file on the site controller. This label aids
in the identification and organization of files.
A valid version label has at least 1 and maximum 12 characters that

can be any content but no space and no non-alphanumerical characters
except for underscore and dot (full-stop; period) are allowed (i.e. valid
label characters are: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, ‘_’ and ‘.’).
• "current" state - Flag (either enabled or disabled) used by the Site Controller to identify
files to be used as current without rebooting the Site Controller.
• "use next" state - Flag (either enabled or disabled) used by the Site Con-
troller to identify files loaded at boot.
4-8 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Establishing a Communications Link with the TSC
• "fallback" state - Flag (either enabled or disabled) used by the Site Controller
to identify files to be used as fallback during boot.
The "use next" and "fallback" flags may not be simultaneously set,
only one may be enabled at a time. The "current" state can only be set
together with the "use next" state. The "x21.code" file cannot be set to
current. Use 'reset' to run the new "x21.code".
It is necessary to assign a label to new files, or file sets. If all files selected for download are
not assigned a label, the user may not proceed with the download.
The user may select one or more items for modification from the list of files for download. The selected
(highlighted) list items are updated with the values in the Version label edit box and Current, Use Next and
Fallback check boxes when the Update selected items button is pressed. The version labels are tested for
valid format and uniqueness amongst both the files already on the target and the files to be downloaded. If
the version label is valid, the selected "current", "use next" and "fallback" values also are set.
An additional list is present to aid the user in selecting a new unique version label. The "Matching
files on the site controller" list contains the files currently on site controller, which correspond to
the items currently selected files in the list of files to be downloaded.
If the user presses the OK button, all items in the list of files to be downloaded are tested for valid version
labels. If the version labels are valid, the download process proceeds, if not the window remains open.
The user may not proceed with download until all files have been assigned valid version labels.
If the version label is not unique, a warning is displayed indicating that the version label has not been
changed. If the user presses the OK button in this warning dialog, this version label is overwritten
and the user is not prevented from continuing with the download. If the user presses the CANCEL
button in this warning dialog, another version label can be entered.
If the user presses the Cancel button, the download operation is ceased.
Establishing a Communications Link with the TSC

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
The BTS Service Software is able to communicate with a Site Controller via a direct serial interface or over a
modem. Connections may be established on a variety of speeds and using several handshaking protocols.
The following topics are useful when setting up or using a connection with the Site Controller:
• "Connect Command" on page 2-115
• "Direct Settings Command (Configuration Menu)" on page 2-127
• "Direct Routing Command (Configuration Menu)" on page 2-127
• "Modem Settings Command (Configuration Menu)" on page 2-128
6802700U57-W October 2010 4-9

Establishing a Communications Link with the TSC Chapter 4: Windows Reference
• "Modem Routing Command (Configuration Menu)" on page 2-130

• "Dialing Directory (Connection menu)" on page 2-120
• "Modem Connection Error" on page 3-11
• "Modem Dialing Error" on page 3-11
4-10 6802700U57-W October 2010

Index
Index
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
A
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
adjacent channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 alarms, environment

adjacent site ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110 severity filter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
adjacent site subscriber class . . . . . . . . 2-111 severity filter level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
adjacent site zone ID . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111 threshold count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
location area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112 threshold timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
main carrier number . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111 threshold type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
max MS TX power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112 alarms, equipment
min RX acc level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113 severity filter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
alarm filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 severity filter level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 threshold count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
alarms, common threshold timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
severity filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 threshold type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
alarms, communication alarms, processing
severity filter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 severity filter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
severity filter level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 severity filter level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
threshold count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 threshold count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
threshold timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 threshold timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
threshold type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 threshold type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
alarms, diagnostics alarms, quality of service
severity filter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 severity filter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
severity filter level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 severity filter level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
threshold count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 threshold count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
threshold timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 threshold timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
threshold type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 threshold type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
B
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
base radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 base radio, RF

base radio, general carrier number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
cabinet ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106 default transmit power level. . . . . . . . . 2-109
factory password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106 receive frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
field password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106 transmit frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
position ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107 BTS types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
C
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 configuration menu (contd.)

configuration menu modem settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
access configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131 passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
direct routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127 configuration upload from the BTS . . . . . . . 1-6
direct settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127 connect command
modem routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130 communications mode . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
6802700U57-W October 2010 IX-1

Index
connection menu connection menu (contd.)

close connection command . . . . . . . . . 2-120 hang up command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
connect command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113 log to file command . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
connect direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116 send files command . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
connect modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117 stop logging command . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
connect telnet from personality . . . . . . . 2-118 telnet connection settings . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
connect telnet new . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118 upload configuration command . . . . . . . 2-125
connect telnet site history . . . . . . . . . . 2-118 upload diagnostics command . . . . . . . . 2-124
dialling directory command . . . . . . . . . 2-120
D
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
data files Diagnostics

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 uploading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 diagnostics file upload from the BTS. . . . . . . 1-6
data transfer status window . . . . . . . . . . 2-126 downloading files to the BTS . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
E
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
EAS contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 EAS contacts (contd.)

EAS input contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 EAS output contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
F
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
file menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 file menu (contd.)

1,2,3,4 command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 print command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
exit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 print preview command . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
file export command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 print setup command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
file import command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 save as command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
new command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 save command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
open command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
G
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
generated data files generated data files (contd.)

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
H
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
help menu help menu (contd.)

about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132 context help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132 search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
I
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
IAC contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
IX-2 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Index
L
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
log on screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
M
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
P
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
password usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 personality menu (contd.)

personality menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 print to file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
modify command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
S
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
serving cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 2-11 serving celll, carrier (contd.)

access parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 transmit base frequency . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
audio jitter buffer non-vocoded call . . . . . . 2-18 serving celll, disclaimer message . . . . . . . . 2-33
audio jitter buffer vocoded call . . . . . . . . 2-18 serving celll, KEK data
colour code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 intra-zone KEKz activation . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
frame length factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 intra-zone KEKz update 1 . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
late packets for synch delay adjustment . . . . 2-16 intra-zone KEKz update 2 . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
late packets for unsynch delay adjustment . . . 2-16 serving celll, packet data
local time offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 channel downlink buffer size . . . . . . . . . 2-43
location area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 frame length factor for PDCH . . . . . . . . . 2-44
max MS Tx power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 hold-off after failed slot grant . . . . . . . . . 2-42
min Rx access level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 max number of slot grant transmissions . . . . 2-42
minimum priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 random access frame length for PDCH . . . . 2-44
mobile country code . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 random access response timer for PDCH. . . . 2-44
mobile network code . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 random access timing for PDCH . . . . . . . 2-43
optimal synch traffic routing delay . . . . . . 2-15 random access transmissions for PDCH . . . . 2-44
optimal unsynch traffic routing delay . . . . . 2-15 reserved access timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
path delay exceeded . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 serving celll, reselection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
path delay threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 fast reselect hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
radio downlink timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 fast reselect threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
random access frame length. . . . . . . . . . 2-14 slow reselect hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
random access response timer . . . . . . . . . 2-14 slow reselect threshold above fast . . . . . . . 2-34
random access timing . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 serving celll, RF immunity
random access transmissions . . . . . . . . . 2-14 automatic interference handler (enable/dis-
subscriber class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 able) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
system code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 BNCH change interval . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
traffic inactivity delay . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 condition alert hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
worst unsynch traffic routing delay . . . . . . 2-16 condition alrt ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
serving cell, RF immunity enable all channels scrambler . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Receive path threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 received signal level threshold . . . . . . . . 2-45
serving celll, carrier scrambler seed configuration . . . . . . . . . 2-47
carrier offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 serving celll, SCK data
duplex spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 SCK activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
frequency band . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35, 2-108 SCK update 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
RX above TX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 SCK update 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
6802700U57-W October 2010 IX-3

Index
serving celll, security site controller, call (contd.)

air interface encryption enabled . . . . . . . . 2-38 qos cir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
authentication enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 qos ebs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
encrypted SSI address range end address. . . . 2-41 qos eir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
encrypted SSI address range start address . . . 2-41 secondary gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
encrypted static cipher key . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 secondary IP tunnel fragmentation size . . . . 2-85
KSG number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 secondary IP tunnel receive voice . . . . . . 2-100
SCK number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 secondary IP tunnel remote address . . . . . . 2-85
SCK version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 secondary netmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
security class 1 MS supported . . . . . . . . . 2-38 secondary VLAN ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
security class 3 supported. . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 secondary WAN interface VLAN tagging . . . 2-83
site configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3, 2-7 secondary WAN IP . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81, 2-84
eMTS installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 site wide call enabled. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
standby BR extra capacity . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 site wide talk group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
standby BR installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 sqos coupling flag . . . . . . . . . . 2-87 to 2-91
standby TSC installed . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 yellow traffic color map . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
XHUB installed . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 to 2-9 site controller, general
site controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 adjacent site broadcast update . . . . . . . . . 2-55
site controller, address BTS site ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
emergency alarm ack status map . . . . . . . 2-63 BTS zone ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
RCM address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 EAS poll timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
site controller, address range GPS RAIM enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
gateway ID maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 GPS signal lost timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
gateway ID minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 internal codeplug debug . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
site controller, BRC interface LST enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
BRC boot-up time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 MTS PSU Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
BRC registration retries . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 no trunking BS service details. . . . . . . . . 2-54
dual band roaming supported . . . . . . . . . 2-66 site link debounce time . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
fast download BRC reset timer . . . . . . . . 2-65 site trunking hold off time . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
load BRC factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 TSC temperature threshold . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
load BRC timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 site controller, master site interface
main control channel setup timer . . . . . . . 2-66 BTS IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
slow download BRC reset timer . . . . . . . . 2-65 BTS IP network mask . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
site controller, call BTS ZC IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
call length timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 control channel DLCI . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
call set up timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 link recovery timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
common site wide talk group . . . . . . . . . 2-97 network manager DLCI . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
ethernet sitelink type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 packet data DLCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
green traffic color map . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85 primary zone controller IP address . . . . . . 2-68
initial transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93 secondary zone controller IP address . . . . . 2-69
initial transmissionsprivate call ring length short data transport DLCI. . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 zone controller IP address one . . . . . . . . 2-69
interface type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 zone controller IP address selector. . . . . . . 2-70
max number of transmissions . . . . . . . . . 2-93 zone controller IP address two . . . . . . . . 2-70
message timeout for site trunking . . . . . . . 2-96 site controller, network management
primary gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 BTS network mgr IP address . . . . . . . . 2-105
primary IP tunnel fragmentation siz . . . . . . 2-84 network manager port number . . . . . . . 2-104
primary IP tunnel remote address . . . . . . . 2-84 network mgr IP address. . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
primary netmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 primary zone controller subnet mask . . . . 2-105
primary VLAN ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 secondary zone controller subnet mask . . . 2-105
primary WAN interface VLAN tagging . . . . 2-80 zone manager port number . . . . . . . . . 2-105
primary WAN IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 site controller, Network Time Protocol
private call inactivity timer . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 Network Time Server IP address . . . . . . . 2-62
qos cbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86 Network Time Server Secondary IP address . . 2-62
IX-4 6802700U57-W October 2010

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide Index
site controller, Network Time Protocol (contd.) site controller, site reference (contd.)
NTS Frequency Locking . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Automatic resynchronization time . . . . . . . 2-61
site controller, packet data GPS RAIM enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
BTS PD IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 GPS signal lost timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
data TX request transmissions. . . . . . . . 2-101 GPSstart up time out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
end of data transmissions . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
initial ransmissions on PDCH . . . . . . . . 2-102 Reference Signal Source . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
PD gateway IP address . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103 site controller, site router
PD port number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103 CRTP context state packet time . . . . . . . . 2-72
RNG IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103 CRTP enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
site controller, SDTS CRTP stale session timeout . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
BTS SDTS IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 frame relay fragmentation size . . . . . . . . 2-75
max number of short data repeats . . . . . . . 2-98 full status polling counter . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
max number of short data retries . . . . . . . 2-99 LMI enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
max TCP segment size . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99 LMI error threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
SDR inbound TCP port number . . . . . . . . 2-98 LMI LIV time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
SDR IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 monitored events count . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
SDR outbound TCP port number . . . . . . . 2-98 type of service latency time . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
SDR TCP port number . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 site controller, state management . . . . . . . . 2-56
SLM max transmission unit . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 cell lock disable recovery timer . . . . . . . . 2-58
TCP socket buffer size . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100 cell lock enable idle timer. . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
site controller, site link cell unlock disable recovery timer . . . . . . . 2-58
Netcom inbound UDP port number . . . . . . 2-78 cell unlock enable idle down timer . . . . . . 2-57
Netcom outbound UDP port number. . . . . . 2-78 cell unlock enable idle up timer . . . . . . . . 2-56
primary PVC DLCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 cell unlock enable imp timer . . . . . . . . . 2-57
primary PVC IP address . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 site controller, voice
to 2-77, 2-91 to 2-92 voice DLCI table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
primary PVC IP network mask . . . . . 2-76, 2-92 voice port number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
primary PVC recovery timer . . . . . . . . . 2-77 style conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -xvi
secondary PVC DLCI . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 system menu
secondary PVC IP address . . . . . . . 2-77, 2-92 close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
secondary PVC IP network mask . . . . 2-77, 2-93 maximize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
site controller, site reference restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Automatic Re-synchronization when no size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 switch to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Automatic resynchronization . . . . . . . . . 2-61
V
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
view menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 view menu (contd.)

status bar command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Z
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
zmodem file transfer status . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
6802700U57-W October 2010 IX-5

User - Manual Mts

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

User - Manual Mts

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Global Customer Documentation

TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS)

© 20 Motorola, Inc.

68015000406 6802800U86 68015000407 68015000358 68015000352

68015000418 68015000359 68015000360

366: Radio Management

68015000408 68015000381 68015000382 68015000377 68015000365

373: Performance Management

PCI Crypto Provisioning End-to-End AUC Crypto TESS Software Network

Console Manuals Quick Reference Online Help

68015000352 68015000330 6802800U86 68015000404 68015000378

Security FullVision System Alarms MultiCADI Radio User Telephone Data

68015000377 68015000358 68015000359 68015000380 68015000379 68015000152 68015000381

Security/Authentication Console Manuals

395: Authentication and

Tools Online Help

Dimetra IP Dimetra IP Backup/Restore System Administering Data Telephone

68015000172 6802800U86 68015000174 68015000173 68015000299 68015000153 68015000152

Bk.1: Fault Management Bk.1: Radio Management

68015000189 68015000160 6866600D59

Security/Authentication Quick Reference

68015000169 6802800U40 68015000300

Bk.1: Authentication and Provisioning Subsystem

Authentication PCI Crypto Managing Radio

Air Interface AUC Crypto CryptR End to End Managing the

Console Manuals Online Help

68015000165 6802800U86 68015000177 68015000154 68015000157 6866600D67 68015000152

Bk.1: Fault Management Bk.1: Radio Management

68015000164 68015000160 6866600D59

68015000169 6802800U40 6881132E24 68015000170 68015000176

Bk.1: Authentication and Provisioning Subsystem

Authentication End to End Air Interface AUC Crypto

Console Manuals Tools Online Help

6866600D80 6866600D81 6866600D83 6866600D86 6802800U86

Fault Bk.1: Fault Management Configuration Bk.1: User Configuration Manager

Bk.1: MCC 7500 Console Sites

Quick Reference Guides Feature Manuals

Managing Radio Managing the Server and Telephone

Bk.1: HW and SW Safety Installation Guidelines

Bk.1: Master Site Overview Bk.4: Network Transport Management

Feature Manuals Tools

Agency Priority Data MultiCADI RUA / RUI Telephone Backup/Restore UCS

Authentication Managing Network

Console Manuals Online Help

6866600D35 6866600D44 6866600D48 6866600D51 6802800U86

Fault Bk.1: Fault Management Configuration Bk.1: User Configuration Manager

MCC 7500 Bk.1: MCC 7500 Console Sites

Quick Reference Guides Feature Manuals

Managing Radio Managing the Server and Telephone Data

6866600D49 6866600D50 6866600D47 6866600D43 6866600D42

Authentication PCI Crypto

Provisioning Managing End to End Air Interface

Feature Manuals Tools

Alias Integrated Data Telephone MultiCADI Backup/Restore UCS

Authentication End to End Air Interface

Network Managing Provisioning PCI Crypto AUC Crypto

6866600D32 6866600D25 6802800U40 6881132E24 6866600D22 6802800U71

Console Manuals Online Help

Understanding Fault Configuration Booklet 1: Managing Zone Infrastructure Monitoring

Security Authentication, Managing Dimetra IP

6802800U80 6802800U81 6802800U82 6802800U83 6802800U86

Booklet 1: MCC 7500 Console Sites

Console Manuals Quick Reference Guide

© 20 Motorola, Inc.